diff options
author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2023-06-09 20:19:52 +0000 |
---|---|---|
committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2023-06-09 20:19:52 +0000 |
commit | bea33e16f382ecf8188f0b613d553f8367f8d0d3 (patch) | |
tree | e88c683b3c53728bc08b661af5d42933f6614549 /Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab | |
parent | 31c338d4c559ed4bd789902a355068edc3bb9776 (diff) |
latex2e (9jun23)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@67314 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab')
21 files changed, 11558 insertions, 374 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/documentmetadata-support.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/documentmetadata-support.dtx index 23053a484ae..0dccdd87cb5 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/documentmetadata-support.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/documentmetadata-support.dtx @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % %% File: documentmetadata-support.dtx -% Copyright (C) 2021-2022 The LaTeX Project +% Copyright (C) 2021-2023 The LaTeX Project % % It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the % LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this @@ -18,8 +18,8 @@ % for those people who are interested or want to report an issue. % % \begin{macrocode} -\def\documentmetadatasupportversion{1.0b} -\def\documentmetadatasupportdate{2022-14-04} +\def\documentmetadatasupportversion{1.0d} +\def\documentmetadatasupportdate{2023-06-07} % \end{macrocode} % % @@ -64,13 +64,19 @@ % While the underlying functionality is still under % development (e.g., further keys will be added over time and keys % marked temporary may vanish again) the code for -% \cs{DocumentMetadata} is place in a separate bundle, so that it +% \cs{DocumentMetadata} is placed in a separate bundle, so that it % is easier to update it without the need to build a full \LaTeX{} % release. Over time the functionality will move fully into the % kernel. +% +% \cs{DocumentMetadata} also loads and activates +% the new PDF management code from \pkg{pdfmanagement-testphase}. +% As this forces the loading of the \pkg{l3backend} files, a backend +% that can't be detected automatically like |dvipdfmx|, +% must be set in the first \cs{DocumentMetadata}. % % From a process perspective \cs{DocumentMetadata} loads the -% \pkg{pdfmanagement} code the first time it is called and then +% \pkg{pdfmanagement-testphase} code the first time it is called and then % redefines itself to only manage key/value pairs in case it is % called more than once. In particular, this means that a document % without a \cs{DocumentMetadata} declaration has no code available @@ -84,10 +90,12 @@ % % % Currently the following keys are implemented for \cs{DocumentMetadata}: +% \DescribeMkey{backend} % \DescribeMkey{colorprofiles} % \DescribeMkey{debug} % \DescribeMkey{lang} % \DescribeMkey{pdfstandard} +% \DescribeMkey{xmp} % \DescribeMkey{pdfversion} % \DescribeMkey{testphase} % \DescribeMkey{uncompress} @@ -110,15 +118,36 @@ % \item[\texttt{pdfstandard}] Choice key to set the pdf standard. % Currently |A-1b|, |A-2a|, |A-2b|, |A-2u|, |A-3a|, |A-3b|, |A-3u| and |A-4| are accepted as % values. The casing is irrelevant, |a-1b| works too. -% The underlying code to ensure the requirements (as far as they -% can be ensured) is still incomplete, but a color profile is included and the -% \texttt{/OutputIntent} is set. The |u| variants for example do not force unicode, -% but they will pass the information to hyperref and hyperxmp. The |a| variants -% do \emph{not} enforce (or even test) a tagged pdf yet. The |A-4| support is -% currently incomplete. +% Note that using these +% key doesn't mean that the document actually follows the standard. \LaTeX{} +% can neither ensure nor check all requirements of a standard, and not everything +% it can do theoretically has already been implemented. +% When setting an A-standard a color profile is included and the +% \texttt{/OutputIntent} is set and javascript action in hyperref are suppressed. +% The |u| variants do not enforce unicode, +% but they will pass the information to hyperref. The |a| variants +% do \emph{not} enforce (or even test) a tagged pdf yet. +% +% Starting with version 0.95s of \pkg{pdfmanagement-testphase} +% it is also possible to use the values +% |X-4|, |X-4p|, |X-5g|, |X-5n|, |X-5pg|, |X-6|, |X-6n|, |X-6p|, |UA-1| for +% a PDF/X and PDF/UA standard. These keys currently set \emph{only} the relevant +% XMP-metadata. In version 0.95z support for |UA-2| has been added but +% note that |UA-2| hasn't been released yet. It should be used only together +% with pdf version 2.0. +% +% |pdfstandard| can be used more than once to set overlapping standards, e.g:\\ +% |pdfstandard=A-2b,pdfstandard=X-4,pdfstandard=UA-1| +% +% If XMP-metadata are added (see the following key \texttt{xmp} +% the needed conformance marker for the standards are set. +% % More information can be found in the documentation -% of \pkg{l3pdfmeta}. +% of \pkg{l3pdfmeta}. % +% \item[\texttt{xmp}] A boolean, if set to false no XMP metadata are added to the PDF. +% The initial value is true. Details are described in the documentation of \pkg{l3pdfmeta}. +% % \item[\texttt{colorprofiles}] This allows to load icc-colorprofiles. Details % are described in the documentation of \pkg{l3pdfmeta}. % @@ -132,11 +161,28 @@ % |\tagpdfsetup{activate,interwordspace}|. This phase % is frozen. % \item[\texttt{phase-II}] -% This is the current development phase. -% Currently it differs from \texttt{phase-I} only in one point: It will +% It differs from \texttt{phase-I} only in one point: It will % additionally activate tagging of paragraphs with % |\tagpdfsetup{paratagging}|. In the upcoming months it will % also enable automatic tagging of other basic document elements. +% \item[\texttt{phase-III}] +% This is the current development phase. +% It differs from \texttt{phase-II} \emph{a lot}: It will +% load new code for the tagging of lists, sectioning commands, +% table of contents and similar lists, graphics, minipages and floats. +% As it redefines many internals it is currently restricted to the use of +% standard classes (article, report, and book) +% and it supports only a limited number of add-on packages. +% \item[\texttt{new-or-1}] This patches a few commands related +% to the output routine. The patches are needed for the tagging +% of paragraphs, for the tagging of header and footer and +% to allow the PDF management to insert code which avoids that +% links happening at page breaks spills into the header and footer. +% This code is automatically loaded if the \texttt{testphase} values +% \texttt{phase-I}, \texttt{phase-II} or \texttt{new-or} are used.% +% \item[\texttt{new-or}] This loads more changes to the output routine required for the +% tagging. It is not compatible with every class! The code is also loaded by the +% \texttt{phase-II} value. % \end{description} % The |testphase| key can only be used in the first \cs{DocumentMetadata}. % @@ -151,6 +197,10 @@ % \item[\texttt{firstaidoff}] This accepts a comma lists of keywords and disables the patches % related to them. More information can be found in the documentation of % \pkg{pdfmanagement-firstaid}. +% \item[\texttt{xmp-export}] This will export the XMP-metadata to a file \verb+\jobname.xmpi+. +% with \texttt{debug=\{xmp-export=filename\}} the file name can be changed. +% More information can be found in the documentation of \pkg{l3pdfmeta} of the \pkg{pdfmanagement-testphase} +% bundle. % \end{description} % \end{description} % diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-amsmath.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-amsmath.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e1f95730fae --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-amsmath.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-amsmath.dtx +% +% Copyright (C) 2022,2023 The LaTeX Project +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% +% The development version of the bundle can be found below +% +% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab +% +% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue. +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-amsmath.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% +% +% \title{The \texttt{latex-lab-amsmath} code\thanks{}} +% \author{\LaTeX{} Project} +% +% \maketitle +% +% \newcommand\fmi[1]{\begin{quote} TODO: \itshape #1\end{quote}} +% \newcommand\NEW[1]{\marginpar{\mbox{}\hfill\fbox{New: #1}}} +% \providecommand\class[1]{\texttt{#1.cls}} +% \providecommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% +% \begin{abstract} +% \end{abstract} +% +% \tableofcontents +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% This file implements adaptations to the \pkg{amsmath} package needed for +% the tagging project. +% +% \MaybeStop{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex } +% +% \section{The Implementation} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<@@=math> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*kernel> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{File declaration} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesFile{latex-lab-amsmath.ltx} + [2023-01-05 v0.1a amsmath adaptions] +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsection{Tagpdf support} +% To make the code independent from tagging being loaded and active +% we load the \pkg{tagpdf-base} package: +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{tagpdf-base} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOn +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{\cs{intertext}} +% The \cs{intertext} command errors with active tagging as it is processed twice +% which leads to duplicated structures. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{package/amsmath/after} + { + \def\intertext@{% + \def\intertext##1{% + \ifvmode\else\\\@empty\fi + \noalign{% + \penalty\postdisplaypenalty\vskip\belowdisplayskip + \vbox{ +% \end{macrocode} +% Stop tagging when measuring: +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifmeasuring@\tag_stop:\fi + \normalbaselines + \ifdim\linewidth=\columnwidth + \else \parshape\@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% End the previous mc: +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_mc_end_push: +% \end{macrocode} +% We are already in a par so we change now to Span: +% \begin{macrocode} + \tagpdfsetup{paratag=Span}% + \noindent\ignorespaces##1\par +% \end{macrocode} +% Restart the MC +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}}% + \penalty\predisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayskip% + }% + }} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOff +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%</kernel> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \Finale +% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-bib.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-bib.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9a5ee81720d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-bib.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,406 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-bib.dtx (C) Copyright 2023 LaTeX Project +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% +% The development version of the bundle can be found below +% +% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab +% +% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue. +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-bib.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% +% \title{The \textsf{latex-lab-bib} package\\ +% Changes and additions to the kernel related to tagging and links in citations and +% bibliography entries} +% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial implementation done by Ulrike Fischer}} +% \date{Version 0.81 2023-06-07} +% +% \maketitle +% +% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}} +% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}} +% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class +% customizations}} +% +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% +% \begin{abstract} +% \end{abstract} +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% The followings contains small changes to improve tagging of +% bibliography entries and citations. +% +% The tagging of the standard bibliography is actually quite straightforward: +% A bibliography is typically a list with a heading and the code which tags sectioning +% commands and lists handles that. +% +% There are here only two problems: +% +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The structure number of the \texttt{LI} element +% created by a \cs{bibitem} must be recorded somehow to allow to reference it in +% a \cs{cite}. +% \item \pkg{hyperref} redefines the item command and so breaks the list structure +% see \url{https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/discussions/1010#discussioncomment-5565418} +% \end{itemize} +% +% Both problems are rather easy to resolve, but it must be checked if other packages +% interfere again by redefining the commands. +% +% More difficult is the tagging of citation commands. Citations should be inside +% a Reference structure and contain a /Ref entry pointing to the relevant +% item in the bibliography. For simple citations like +% \enquote{[1]} or \enquote{Doody (2023)} this is easy, but it is not obvious how +% to handle combined citations like \enquote{Doody (2003,2018)} (or even compressed citations +% like \enquote{[1-3]}). The current implementation follows the links: whatever hyperref would +% link is set as the reference. +% +% There exist various packages which over the years tried to improve and extend +% the bibliography commands. We discuss here three: natbib, chapterbib and biblatex. +% +% \begin{description} +% \item[natbib] It is rather easy to support natbib: it has hooks for links and the tagging code +% can follow. Only a bit coordination with hyperref is needed to avoid that hyperref +% remove the tagging code again. +% +% \item[chapterbib] In standard LaTeX every bib entry has an unique label which points to the +% (mandatory and unique) bibliography and the target created by hyperref +% has the simple form \texttt{cite.}\meta{key}. +% If a package that support multiple bibliographies is used (e.g. chapterbib) +% this is no longer works: a bib entry \texttt{doody} +% can in one chapter get the label \enquote{[1]} +% and in the other \enquote{[5]} or even \enquote{Doo19} and naturally links +% should jump to the relevant chapter bibliography. chapterbib solves this +% by creating bib keys with a suffix: when reading the \texttt{.aux} files it will +% create the keys \texttt{doody@-1} and \texttt{doody@-2} where the number is related +% to the chapter/include, and in the document and in the document \verb+\cite{doody}+ +% will look for \texttt{doody@-1} and \texttt{doody@-2} depending on the number of the +% current include. For some unknown reason chapterbib uses two commands +% to handle the suffix: the command \cs{@extra@binfo} is written to the aux-files +% and used when processing the \cs{bibcite} commands, +% but in the document \cs{@extra@b@citeb} is used. Supporting this is +% straightforward: one only has to take care that the tagging code uses +% \cs{@extra@b@citeb} in the relevant places too. +% +% \item[biblatex] biblatex supports multiple bibliographies out-of-the-box. +% It numbers the link target by refsection and uses then the name +% \verb+\the\c@refsection @+\meta{key}. +% +% Printing a bibliography is not required, in this case you get an engine warning +% and links jump to the begin of the document: +% \begin{verbatim} +% name{cite.0@doody} has been referenced but does not exist +% \end{verbatim} +% +% Bibliographies can be printed more than once by refsection. To avoid duplicated +% target, biblatex stores the names of the targets in a list and if later +% it detects that a target name has already been used in a +% bibliography no new target is created for this item. This means a citation +% will normally jump to the first bibliography which shows the entry. +% +% The tagging code has to mimic this code. This means that it can't label every item, +% but has to test if this anchor is already known. +% \end{description} +% +% +% \section{Implementation} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*package> +%<@@=tag> +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesExplPackage {latex-lab-testphase-bib} {2023-05-18} {0.8} + {Code related to the tagging of bibliography and cite command} +% \end{macrocode} +% We need at least the block tagging code. +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-block-tagging} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% At first we suppress the patches from hyperref. This will only work with the next +% hyperref! +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\hyper@nopatch@bib{} +% \end{macrocode} + +% \begin{macro}{\@extra@binfo,\@extra@b@citeb} +% These are taken from hyperref, they are for chapterbib compability (and also +% signal to chapterbib not to change the citation commands) +% \begin{macrocode} +\providecommand*\@extra@binfo{}% +\providecommand\@extra@b@citeb{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_bib_citekey_tl} +% We can't pass the cite key everywhere as argument so we store it: +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N\l_@@_bib_citekey_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +%\subsection{Handling the bibliography} +% \begin{macro}{\@lbibitem} +% The item command if an optional argument is used. +% +% We only prepend some code. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHookWithArguments{cmd/@lbibitem/before} + { +% \end{macrocode} +% we store the target name for the label. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_set:Nn\l_@@_bib_citekey_tl{#2} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% The target is added at the begin of the paragraph. We give that a label as +% it perhaps need to be removed by packages +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHookWithArguments{cmd/@lbibitem/before}[latex-lab-testphase-bib/target] + { + \AddToHookNext{para/begin} + { + \makebox[0pt][r]{\MakeLinkTarget*{cite.#2\@extra@b@citeb}\hspace{\leftmargin}} + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% we make a copy to be able to reinstate the definition. This is e.g. +% currently needed with hyperref. +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\@kernel@copy@lbibitem\@lbibitem +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@bibitem} +% Similar for \cs{@bibitem}. +% TODO: If hyperref is loaded we will get a second target from the refstepcounter, +% but this is ignored for now. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHookWithArguments{cmd/@bibitem/before} + { +% \end{macrocode} +% we store the target name for the label. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_set:Nn\l_@@_bib_citekey_tl{#1} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The target is added at the begin of the paragraph. We give that a label as +% it perhaps need to be removed by packages +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHookWithArguments{cmd/@bibitem/before}[latex-lab-testphase-bib/target] + { + \AddToHookNext{para/begin} + { + \makebox[0pt][r]{\MakeLinkTarget*{cite.#1\@extra@b@citeb}\hspace{\leftmargin}} + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\@kernel@copy@bibitem\@bibitem +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% TODO The LI-structure should set a label, we redefine the internal command locally for +% now, but perhaps this need a recipe? +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{env/thebibliography/begin} + { + \cs_set:Npn \__block_list_item_begin: + { + \tag_struct_begin:n + { + tag=\LItag, + label= cite.\l_@@_bib_citekey_tl\@extra@b@citeb + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Handling citation commands} +% We redefine similar to hyperref the \cs{bibcite} command to inject link and +% structure. Even if it looks a bit odd it is now used for many years and so +% hopefully compatible with various packages. But differently to hyperref we use +% the new hooks with arguments. +% TODO: consider hook name. +% \begin{macrocode} +\NewMirroredHookPairWithArguments{bibcite/before}{bibcite/after}{2} +\def\bibcite#1#2{% + \@newl@bel{b}{#1\@extra@binfo}{% + \UseHookWithArguments{bibcite/before}{2}{#1}{#2} + #2 + \UseHookWithArguments{bibcite/after}{2}{#1}{#2} + }% + }% +\let\@kernel@copy@bibcite\bibcite +% \end{macrocode} +% Now we add the tagging structure. +% TODO: with the next tagpdf version it should no longer be +% needed to exand the ref key. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHookWithArguments{bibcite/before} + { + \tag_mc_end_push: + \exp_args:Nx\tagstructbegin{tag=Reference,ref=cite.#1\@extra@b@citeb} + \tagmcbegin{} + } +\AddToHookWithArguments{bibcite/after}[tag] + { + \tag_mc_end: + \tagstructend + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% At last the code for hyperref, the link will be inside the reference, but +% this can be changed with a rule. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{package/hyperref/after} + { + \AddToHookWithArguments{bibcite/before} + { + \hyper@linkstart{cite}{cite.#1\@extra@b@citeb} + } + \AddToHookWithArguments{bibcite/after}{\hyper@linkend} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Natbib and biblatex support} +% When hyperref is loaded, both natbib and biblatex use \cs{hyper@natlinkstart} +% and \cs{hyper@natlinkend} to handle the links. We can use the generic hooks to +% add the tagging code (and the link code from hyperref). +% We need in part different code for both systems: +% with biblatex we have to take care that only the first +% structure sets a label, and if +% hyperref is not loaded (or deactived) we will need additional code +% but this currently doesn't exist. +% We assume that no document loads both package -- that will probably break. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\hyper@natlinkstart[1]{} +\newcommand\hyper@natlinkend{} +% \end{macrocode} +% With natbib we need to change the hooks to avoid duplicated target as it sets +% the anchor too. We can not simply empty \cs{hyper@natanchorstart} as that is +% used by biblatex. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{package/natbib/after} + { + \RemoveFromHook{cmd/@bibitem/before} [latex-lab-testphase-bib/target] + \RemoveFromHook{cmd/@lbibitem/before}[latex-lab-testphase-bib/target] + } +% \end{macrocode} +% This can be shared by both packages: it will work with natbib with and without hyperref. +% With biblatex it will work without hyperref as long as \cs{@extra@b@citeb} is empty +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHookWithArguments{cmd/hyper@natlinkstart/before} + { + \leavevmode + \tag_mc_end_push: + \exp_args:Nx\tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Reference,ref=cite.#1\@extra@b@citeb} + \tag_mc_begin:n{} + } +\AddToHook{cmd/hyper@natlinkend/after} + { + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_end: + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{} + } + +% \end{macrocode} +% if hyperref is loaded we have to revert its definition of the natbib hooks +% and add its code through the generic hooks. +% TODO: allow to suppress the natbib code in hyperref. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{package/hyperref/after} + { + \renewcommand\hyper@natlinkstart[1]{} + \renewcommand\hyper@natlinkend{} + \AddToHookWithArguments{cmd/hyper@natlinkstart/before} + { + \Hy@backout{#1}% +% \end{macrocode} +% natbib passes the \cs{@extra@b@citeb} in the argument, and biblatex +% the refsection, so we only need to add the prefix \texttt{cite.}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \hyper@linkstart{cite}{cite.#1}% + \def\hyper@nat@current{#1} + } + \AddToHook{cmd/hyper@natlinkend/after} + { + \hyper@linkend + } + } + +% \end{macrocode} +% and now special biblatex code. The list item code has to test if the +% anchor is already known: +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{cmd/blx@bibinit/after} + { + \cs_set:Npn \__block_list_item_begin: + { + \xifinlist{\the\c@refsection @\abx@field@entrykey}{\blx@anchors} + { + \tag_struct_begin:n + { + tag=\LItag, + } + } + { + \tag_struct_begin:n + { + tag=\LItag, + label= cite.\the\c@refsection @\abx@field@entrykey + } + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% biblatex without hyperref is currently not supported but we at least avoid that it +% errors: +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{package/biblatex/after} + { + \appto\blx@mknohyperref + { + \let\blx@anchors\@empty + \protected\def\blx@anchor{% + \xifinlist{\the\c@refsection @\abx@field@entrykey}{\blx@anchors} + {} + {\listxadd\blx@anchors{\the\c@refsection @\abx@field@entrykey}}}% + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +%</package> +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latex-lab> +\ProvidesFile{bib-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [2023-05-18 v0.8 code related to the tagging of bib and citations] + +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-bib} + +%</latex-lab> +% \end{macrocode} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-block-tagging.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-block-tagging.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..63145d929e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-block-tagging.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,4055 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-block-tagging.dtx (C) Copyright 2021-2023 LaTeX Project +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} +\usepackage{amstext} +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex + +\usepackage{todonotes} + +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-block-tagging.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% + +\def\ltblocksversion{v0.8d} +\def\ltblocksdate{2023/06/07} + +% +% \title{Prototype reimplementation of \LaTeXe{}'s block environments using templates} +% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial reimplementation of lists done by Bruno +% Le Floch, generalized second version with tagging support by Frank Mittelbach.}} +% \date{\ltblocksversion\ \ltblocksdate} +% +% \maketitle +% +% +% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}} +% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}} +% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class +% customizations}} +% +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% \providecommand\struct[1]{\texttt{<#1>}} +% +% \NewDocElement[envlike, idxtype=objecttype, idxgroup=object types, +% printtype=\textit{objecttype}] {ObjectType}{objecttype} +% +% \NewDocElement[envlike, idxtype=template, idxgroup=templates, +% printtype=\textit{templ.}] {Template}{template} +% +% \NewDocElement[envlike, idxtype=instance, idxgroup=instances, +% printtype=\textit{inst.}] {Instance}{instance} +% +% +% \newcommand\valuefrom[1]{\textrm{value from }\texttt{#1}} +% \newcommand\key[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% +% +% \NewDocumentCommand\fmi{sO{}m} +% {\IfBooleanTF{#1}{\todo[inline,#2]{#3}}^^A +% {\todo[#2]{#3}}} +% +% \NewDocumentCommand\ufi{sO{}m} +% {\IfBooleanTF{#1}{\todo[inline,#2]{UFi:#3}}^^A +% {\todo[#2]{UFi:#3}}} +% \makeatletter +% \renewenvironment{TemplateInterfaceDescription}[1] +% { +% \subsubsection{The~object~type~`#1'} +% \begingroup +% \@beginparpenalty\@M +% \description +% \def\TemplateArgument##1##2{\item[Arg:~##1]##2\par} +% \def\TemplateSemantics +% { +% \enddescription\endgroup +% \subsubsection*{Semantics:} +% } +% } +% { +% \par\bigskip +% } +% \renewenvironment{TemplateDescription}[2] +% {\subsubsection{The \texttt{#1} template `#2'}^^A +% \paragraph*{Attributes:}^^A +% \begingroup +% \@beginparpenalty\@M +% \description +% \def\TemplateKey##1##2##3##4{^^A +% \item[\texttt{##1}~(\textit{\mdseries##2})]##3^^A +% \ifx\TemplateKey##4\TemplateKey\else +% \hfill\penalty500\hbox{}\hfill Default:~\texttt{##4}^^A +% \nobreak\hskip-\parfillskip\hskip0pt\relax +% \fi +% \par +% }^^A +% \def\TemplateSemantics{^^A +% \enddescription\endgroup +% \paragraph*{Semantics~\&~Comments:}^^A +% }^^A +% } +% { \par \bigskip } +% \makeatother +% +% +% \begin{abstract} +% \end{abstract} +% +% +% \tableofcontents +% \medskip +% +% +% \begin{documentation} +% +% +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% The list implementation in \LaTeXe{} serves a dual purpose: it +% implements real lists such as \env{itemize} or \env{enumerate}, +% but it is also used as the basis for vertical blocks, i.e., to specify +% the vertical spacing and paragraph handling after such block, e.g., +% in environments like \env{center}, \env{quote}, \env{verbatim}, or in +% the theorem environments. They are all implemented as +% \enquote{trivial} lists with a single (hidden) item. +% +% While this was convenient to get a consistent layout using a single +% implementation it is not adequate if it comes to interpreting the +% structure of a document, because environments based on \env{trivlist} +% should not advertise themselves as being a \enquote{list} --- after all, +% from a semantic point of view they aren't lists. +% +% The approach taking here is therefore to offer separate object +% types: \xt{block} (horizontally or vertically oriented data that +% needs some handling at the start and the end), \xt{para} (that deals +% with different paragraph layouts), \xt{list} (that handles list +% related parameters, and \xt{item} (for item layouts and handling), to address +% the independent aspects and also offer the object type \xt{blockenv} +% that ties them together as necessary. +% +% For example, a \env{quote} environment would make use of a (display) +% \xt{block} and some \xt{para} handling while an standard +% \env{enumerate} would make use of a display \xt{block}, a \xt{list}, +% and an \xt{item} and \xt{para} instance. +% An inline list (like \env{enumerate*} from the \pkg{enumitem} +% package) would be using the same \xt{list} instance but a different +% (horizontally oriented) \xt{block}. +% +% +% \section{Object types and templates for blocks and lists} +% +% \subsection{Object types} +% +% \begin{TemplateInterfaceDescription}{block} +% \TemplateArgument{1}{key/value list to alter the default block parameters} +% \TemplateSemantics +% Handle the layout aspects of a block of data. In case of a +% \enquote{display} block (i.e., vertically oriented) the spacing +% and page breaking as well as the handling if the block starts a +% paragraph or ends one, that is, if text is immediately following +% the block without being separated by an empty line, then this +% text is considered to be in the same paragraph as the block. +% +% In case of a horizontally oriented block it covers any special +% handling at the start and end of the block, e.g, extra spacing, +% prohibitying or encuraging line breaks, and so forth. +% \end{TemplateInterfaceDescription} +% +% \begin{TemplateInterfaceDescription}{para} +% \TemplateArgument{1}{key/value list to alter the default item parameters} +% \TemplateSemantics +% Sets up paragraph-specific parameters for H\&J, e.g., to +% implement justification variations, the behavior of \verb=\\= +% etc. The instances are used in higher-level templates, e.g., in a +% \xt{block}. +% \end{TemplateInterfaceDescription} +% +% \begin{TemplateInterfaceDescription}{list} +% \TemplateArgument{1}{key/value list to alter the default item parameters} +% \TemplateSemantics +% Handle the aspects related to list design, e.g., the use and +% formatting of counters, etc. +% +% Note that this does not cover block-related aspects, i.e., a list +% instance could be used both for a display list or for an inline line. +% \end{TemplateInterfaceDescription} +% +% \begin{TemplateInterfaceDescription}{item} +% \TemplateArgument{1}{key/value list to alter the default item parameters} +% \TemplateSemantics +% A sub-type used as part of \xt{list} to easily cover alternative layout +% for list items. +% \end{TemplateInterfaceDescription} +% +% +% \begin{TemplateInterfaceDescription}{blockenv} +% \TemplateArgument{1}{key/value list to alter the default item parameters} +% \TemplateSemantics +% This object type is used to implement document-level +% environments. It defines a \xt{block} instance to handle the +% layout at the \enquote{edge} of the environment data, possibly +% some paragraph setup through a \xt{para} instance, potentially an +% \enquote{inner} instance for more complicated environments (such +% as lists), and possibly some additional setup code for certain +% environments. +% +% It also defines how the \xt{blockenv} behaves with respect to +% nesting, e.g., does it change when nested and if so how many +% levels of nesting are supported, etc. +% +% Finally, the object type defines how it appears in a tagged PDF +% document, what tag names are used, how they are rolemapped and +% whether it adds additional attributes, etc. +% \end{TemplateInterfaceDescription} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Templates} +% +% +% \begin{TemplateDescription}{blockenv}{display} +% +% \TemplateKey{env-name}{tokenlist} +% {Name of the environment used only in tracing}{} +% \TemplateKey{tag-name}{tokenlist} +% {Name of the tag in the PDF. If not explicitly given +% the name is defined by the \key{tagging-recipe}}{} +% \TemplateKey{tag-class}{tokenlist} +% {An explicit tag class attribute}{} +% \TemplateKey{tagging-recipe}{tokenlist} +% {Defines the way tagging is done. Currently the values +% \texttt{basic}, \texttt{standard}, and \texttt{list} +% are supported}{standard} +% \TemplateKey{level-increase}{boolean}{Does this \xt{blockenv} +% increase the block level if it is nested in an outer block?}{true} +% \TemplateKey{setup-code}{tokenlist} +% {Initial setup code. This is +% executed after legacy defaults (from \cs{@listi}, +% \cs{@listii}, etc.) are used but before the block instance is called}{} +% \TemplateKey{block-instance}{tokenlist}{Part of the name of the +% \xt{block} instance that is called. The full name has +% a \texttt{-}\meta{level} appended}{displayblock} +% \TemplateKey{para-instance}{tokenlist}{}{} +% \TemplateKey{inner-level-counter}{tokenlist}{Name of an existing (!) counter +% that is incremented and used to determine final name +% of the \key{inner-instance} or empty if always the +% same inner instance should be used}{} +% \TemplateKey{max-inner-levels}{tokenlist}{Maximum number of nested +% environments of this kind. Only relevant if there is a +% \key{inner-level-counter} specified}{4} +% \TemplateKey{inner-instance-type}{tokenlist}{Opject type of the +% inner instance}{list} +% \TemplateKey{inner-instance}{tokenlist}{Name of the inner instance +% (if any).}{} +% \TemplateKey{para-flattened}{boolean}{\emph{describe}}{false} +% \TemplateKey{final-code}{tokenlist}{Final setup code}{\cs{ignorespaces}} +% +% \TemplateSemantics +% +% This \xt{blockenv} template supports the legacy list setting that +% are found in many document classes in the macros \cs{@listi}, +% \cs{@listii}, up to \cs{@listvi}. It also uses the counter +% \cs{@listdepth} to track nesting of block, again mainly to +% support legacy setups (internally it gives it a more appropriate +% name but it remains accessible through the \LaTeXe{} name). +% +% +% It first checks that nothing is too deeply nested. +% If the level should increase then the increments the +% \cs{@listdepth} counter and +% calls the corresponding \cs{@list...} macro to update the legacy +% defaults. If \key{level-increase} is set to false this is bypassed. +% +% It then sets up the +% tagging via the \key{tagging-recipe} setting and executes any +% code in \key{setup-code}. +% +% Afterwards it calls the appropriate \xt{block} instance based on +% \key{block-instance} and current level, e.g., +% \texttt{displayblock-1}. Then it sets up paragraph parameters if +% a \key{para-instance} was specified (otherwise they stay as +% they are). +% +% If a \key{inner-instance} was specified this is called next, +% or more precisely: if no \key{inner-level-counter} was +% specified the instance \key{inner-instance} is +% called. +% +% Otherwise, the \key{inner-level-counter} is incremented and the +% instance with the name +% \key{inner-instance}\texttt{-}\key{inner-level-counter} is +% called. +% +% Finally, the \key{final-code} is executed (by default +% \cs{ignorespaces}). +% +% +% \end{TemplateDescription} +% +% The maximum number of \xt{blockenv}s that can be nested into each +% other is is restricted by the \LaTeX{} counter +% \texttt{maxblocklevels} with a default value of \texttt{6}. If this +% value is increased then it is necessary to provide additional +% instances, e.g., \texttt{displayblock-7}, etc. Decreasing is, of +% course, always possible, then some of the instances defined are not +% used and instead the user gets an error that there is too much +% nesting going on. +% +% If the key \key{level-increase} is set to \texttt{false} then such +% an environment doesn't alter the nesting level and therefore you can +% nest those environments as often as you like (a typical example +% would be \env{flushleft} anywhere in the nesting hierarchy, that +% would have no effect on hitting the boundary). +% +% +% \begin{TemplateDescription}{block}{display} +% +% \TemplateKey{heading}{tokenlist}{\emph{not really used yet}}{} +% \TemplateKey{beginsep}{skip}{}{\cs{topsep}} +% \TemplateKey{begin-par-skip}{skip}{}{\cs{partopsep}} +% \TemplateKey{par-skip}{skip}{}{\cs{parsep}} +% \TemplateKey{end-skip}{skip}{}{\valuefrom{beginsep}} +% \TemplateKey{end-par-skip}{skip}{}{\valuefrom{begin-par-skip}} +% \TemplateKey{beginpenalty}{integer}{}{\cs{@beginparpenalty}} +% \TemplateKey{endpenalty}{integer}{}{\cs{@endparpenalty}} +% \TemplateKey{leftmargin}{length}{}{\cs{leftmargin}} +% \TemplateKey{rightmargin}{length}{}{\cs{rightmargin}} +% \TemplateKey{parindent}{length}{}{\cs{listparindent}} +% +% \TemplateSemantics +% +% The idea of a \key{heading} key needs some further +% thoughts. Maybe instead the object type should accept a second +% argument and receive input for such a headding from the document +% level instead. +% +% The names of the keys need further thoughts and some +% decision. Right now it is a mixture of those with hyphens and +% those that match legacy register names (the way \pkg{enumitem} +% did its keys). +% +% Also \key{parindent} conflicts with \key{indent-width}! +% +% \end{TemplateDescription} +% +% +% \begin{TemplateDescription}{para}{std} +% +% \TemplateKey{indent-width}{length}{}{\cs{parindent}} +% \TemplateKey{start-skip}{skip}{}{0pt} +% \TemplateKey{left-skip}{skip}{}{0pt} +% \TemplateKey{right-skip}{skip}{}{0pt} +% \TemplateKey{end-skip}{skip}{}{\cs{@flushglue}} +% \TemplateKey{fixed-word-spaces}{boolean}{}{false} +% \TemplateKey{final-hyphen-demerits}{integer}{}{5000} +% \TemplateKey{cr-cmd}{tokenlist}{}{\cs{@normalcr}} +% \TemplateKey{para-class}{tokenlist}{}{justify} +% +% \TemplateSemantics +% +% +% \end{TemplateDescription} +% +% +% +% \begin{TemplateDescription}{list}{std} +% +% \TemplateKey{counter}{tokenlist} +% {Counter name to be used in a numbered list or empty, +% if the list is unnumbered}{} +% \TemplateKey{item-label}{tokenlist} +% {Label \enquote{string} for a fixed label or as +% generated from the current \key{counter} value}{} +% \TemplateKey{start}{integer} +% {Start value for the counter if the list is numbered, +% otherwise irrelevant}{1} +% \TemplateKey{resume}{boolean} +% {Should a numbered list be resumed from the last instance?}{false} +% \TemplateKey{item-instance}{instance} +% {Instance of type \texttt{item} to be used to format +% the label string}{basic} +% \TemplateKey{item-skip}{skip}{The space in front of an item in the +% list.\fmi{May need to be on a different template level}}{\cs{itemsep}} +% \TemplateKey{item-indent}{length}{Horizontal displacement of the item.}{0pt} +% \TemplateKey{item-penalty}{integer} +% {Penalty for breaking before an +% item (except the first)}{\cs{@itempenalty}} +% \TemplateKey{label-width}{length} +% {Width reserved for the formatted item label}{\cs{labelwidth}} +% \TemplateKey{label-sep}{length} +% {Horizontal separation between label and following text}{\cs{labelsep}} +% \TemplateKey{legacy-support}{boolean} +% {Is formatting the label via \cs{makelabel} supported?}{false} +% +% \TemplateSemantics +% +% +% \end{TemplateDescription} +% +% +% \begin{TemplateDescription}{item}{std} +% +% \TemplateKey{counter-label}{function{1}}{\emph{unused}}{\cs{arabic}\{\#1\}} +% \TemplateKey{counter-ref}{function{1}}{\emph{unused}}{\valuefrom{counter-label}} +% \TemplateKey{label-ref}{function{1}}{\emph{unused}}{\#1} +% \TemplateKey{label-autoref}{function{1}}{\emph{unused}}{item~\#1} +% \TemplateKey{label-format}{function{1}} +% {Formatting of the label, questionable the way it is used}{\#1} +% \TemplateKey{label-strut}{boolean}{Add a \cs{strut} to the label?}{false} +% \TemplateKey{label-align}{choice} +% {Supported values \texttt{left},\texttt{center}, +% \texttt{right}, and \texttt{parleft}. \emph{Only partly implemented}}{right} +% \TemplateKey{label-boxed}{boolean} +% {Should the label be boxed?}{true} +% \TemplateKey{next-line}{boolean}{}{false} +% \TemplateKey{text-font}{tokenlist}{\emph{unused}}{} +% \TemplateKey{compatibility}{boolean}{}{true} +% +% \TemplateSemantics +% +% This template is only rudimentary implemented at the moment. It +% probably needs other keys and the existing ones need a proper +% implementation. +% +% \end{TemplateDescription} +% +% +% \section{Tagging support} +% +% \subsection{Paragraph tags} +% +% Paragraphs in \LaTeX{} can be nested, e.g., you can have a paragraph +% containing a display quote, which in turn consists of more than one +% (sub)paragraph, followed by some more text which all belongs to the +% same outer paragraph. +% +% In the PDF model and in the HTML model that is not supported --- a +% limitation that conflicts with real live, given that such +% constructs are quite normal in spoken and written language. +% +% The approach we take to resolve this is to model such \enquote{big} +% paragraphs with a structure named \struct{text-unit} and use \struct{text} (rollmapped to \struct{P}) +% only for (portions of) the actual paragraph text in a way that the +% \struct{text}s are not nested. As a result we have for a simple +% paragraph the structures +% \begin{tabbing} +% \hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\= \kill +% \> \struct{text-unit}\\ +% \>\> \struct{text}\\ +% \>\>\> The paragraph text \ldots\\ +% \>\> \struct{/text}\\ +% \> \struct{/text-unit} +% \end{tabbing} +% The \struct{text-unit} structure is rollmapped to \struct{Part} or possibly to +% \struct{Div} so we get a valid PDF, but processors who care can identify +% the complete paragraphs by looking for \struct{text-unit} tags. +% +% In the case of an element, such as a display quote or a display list +% inside the paragraph, we then have +% \begin{tabbing} +% \hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\= \kill +% \> \struct{text-unit}\\ +% \>\> \struct{text}\\ +% \>\>\> The paragraph text before the display element \ldots\\ +% \>\> \struct{/text}\\ +% \>\> \struct{display element structure}\\ +% \>\>\> Content of the display structure possiblly involving inner \struct{text-unit} tags\\ +% \>\> \struct{/display element structure}\\ +% \>\> \struct{text}\\ +% \>\>\> \ldots{} continuing the outer paragraph text\\ +% \>\> \struct{/text}\\ +% \> \struct{/text-unit} +% \end{tabbing} +% In other words such a display block is always embedded in a +% \struct{text-unit} structure, possibly preceded by a \struct{text}\ldots\struct{/text} block +% and possibly followed by one, though both such blocks are optional. +% +% Thus an \env{itemize} environment that has some introductory text +% but no text immediately following the list +% would be tagged as follows: +% \begin{tabbing} +% \hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\= \kill +% \> \struct{text-unit}\\ +% \>\> \struct{text}\\ +% \>\>\> The intro text for the \env{itemize} environment \ldots\\ +% \>\> \struct{/text}\\ +% \>\> \struct{itemize}\\ +% \>\>\> \struct{LI}\\ +% \>\>\>\> \struct{Lbl} label \struct{/Lbl}\\ +% \>\>\>\> \struct{LBody}\\ +% \>\>\>\>\> The text of the first item involving \struct{text-unit} as necessary \ldots\\ +% \>\>\>\> \struct{/LBody}\\ +% \>\>\> \struct{/LI}\\ +% \>\>\> \struct{LI}\\ +% \>\>\>\> The second item \ldots{}\\ +% \>\>\> \struct{/LI}\\ +% \>\>\> \ldots{} further items \ldots\\ +% \>\> \struct{/itemize}\\ +% \> \struct{/text-unit} +% \end{tabbing} +% The \struct{itemize} is rollmapped to \struct{L}. +% +% For some display blocks, such as centered text, we use a simpler +% strategy. Such blocks still ensure that they are inside a \struct{text-unit} +% structure but their body uses simple \struct{text} blocks and not +% \struct{text-unit}\struct{text} inside, e.g., the input +% \begin{verbatim} +% This is a paragraph with some +% \begin{center} +% centered lines +% +% with a paragraph break between them +% \end{center} +% followed by some more text. +% \end{verbatim} +% will be tagged as follows: +% \begin{tabbing} +% \hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\= \kill +% \> \struct{text-unit}\\ +% \>\> \struct{text}\\ +% \>\>\> This is a paragraph with some\\ +% \>\> \struct{/text}\\ +% \>\> \struct{text /O /Layout /TextAlign/Center}\\ +% \>\>\> centered lines\\ +% \>\> \struct{/text}\\ +% \>\> \struct{text /O /Layout /TextAlign/Center}\\ +% \>\>\> with a paragraph break between them\\ +% \>\> \struct{/text}\\ +% \>\> \struct{text}\\ +% \>\>\> followed by some more text.\\ +% \> \struct{/text-unit} +% \end{tabbing} +% +% +% \subsection{Tagging recipes} +% +% There are a number of different tagging recipes that implement +% different tagging approaches. They are selected through the +% \key{tagging-recipe} of the \xt{blockenv} template. Currently the +% following values are implemented: +% \begin{description} +% \item[\texttt{basic}] +% This recipe does the following: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% Ensure that the \xt{blockenv} is inside a \struct{text-unit} +% structure, if necessary, start one. +% \item +% If inside a \struct{text-unit}\struct{text}, then close the \struct{/text} but +% leave the \struct{text-unit} open. +% +% \item +% Text inside the body of the environment starts with +% \struct{text-unit}\struct{text} if \key{para-flattened} is set to \texttt{false}, +% otherwise just with \struct{text}. +% +% \item +% At the end of the environment close \struct{/text} and possibly an +% inner \struct{/text-unit} if open. +% +% \item +% Then look if the environment is followed by an empty line +% (\cs{par}). If so, close the outer \struct{/text-unit} and start any +% following text with \struct{text-unit}\struct{text}. Otherwise, +% don't and following text restarts with a just a \struct{text} (and no +% paragraph indentation) +% \end{itemize} +% +% +% \item[\texttt{standard}] +% This recipe is like the \texttt{basic} one as far as handling +% \struct{text-unit} and \struct{text} is concerned. In addition +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% it starts an inner tagging structure (i.e., which is therefore a +% child of the outer \struct{text-unit}). +% \item +% By default this structure is a \struct{Figure} unless overwritten +% by the key \key{tag-name}. If that key is used, a suitable +% rollmap needs to be provided for the name given. +% \item +% At the end of the environment that inner structure is closed +% again so that we are back on the \struct{text-unit} level from the outside. +% \item +% Then the lookahead for an empty line is done as described previously. +% \end{itemize} +% +% +% +% \item[\texttt{list}] +% This recipe is like the \texttt{standard} one except that +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% the inner structure is a list (\struct{L}). +% \item +% Furthermore everything is set up so that we have list items +% (\struct{LI}) with suitable substructures (\struct{Lbl} for the item +% labels and \struct{LBody} for the item bodies). +% \item +% If the key \key{tag-name} is specified, this is used as the tag +% name for the whole list instead of \struct{L}. Of course, it +% should then have a suitable rollmap. +% \item +% If the key \key{tag-class} is specified then this is used as the +% class attribute. Again, this requires a suitable setup on the outside. +% \item +% At the end of the environment the \struct{/LBody}, \struct{/LI}, and +% \struct{/L} (or the tag name used) are closed. +% \item +% Then the lookahead for an empty line is done as described previously. +% \end{itemize} +% +% +% \end{description} +% +% +% +% +% +% +% \end{documentation} +% +% \StopEventually{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex } +% +% +% +% \begin{implementation} +% +% \section{The Implementation} +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*package> +%<@@=block> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesPackage {latex-lab-testphase-block-tagging} + [\ltblocksdate\space \ltblocksversion\space + blockenv implementation] +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We make use of templates: +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{xtemplate} +% \end{macrocode} +% Generell kernel changes, also loaded by the sec and toc code. +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-kernel-changes} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOn +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \ufi{this variable(s) must be declared:} +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_item_align_tl +\tl_new:N\l_@@_legacy_env_params_tl +% \end{macrocode} + +% \subsection{Handling \cs{par} after the end of the list} +% +% An empty line (or a \cs{par}) after a list has semantic meaning as +% it defines whether then following text is logically within the same +% paragraph as the list (no empty line) or whether it starts a new +% paragraph and the paragraph containing the list ends at the end of +% the list (empty line after the list). +% This is handled by \LaTeX{} using a legacy flag called +% \texttt{@endpe} and set of commands inside the +% generic \cs{end} (calling \cs{@doendpe}) and as part of the list +% environments identifying themselves as \enquote{paragraph ending +% environments} (by setting this flag). +% +% For the reimplementation of the list environments including support +% of tagging we need to augment that mechanism slightly and add some +% kernel hook(s) to add the tagging code if needed. +% +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@doendpe} +% The original \LaTeXe{} command is augmented to allow for tagging. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@doendpe{\@endpetrue + \def\par + { + \@restorepar + \clubpenalty\@clubpenalty +% \end{macrocode} +% At this point we add the tagging code that closes an open +% \struct{text-unit}, \struct{text} tag combination, +% if necessary: +% \begin{macrocode} + \__kernel_displayblock_doendpe: +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The standard \cs{par} command (\cs{par_end:}) acts on +% \texttt{@endpe} and attempts to close a still open \texttt{text-unit} +% and this would be wrong if it was already closed above. So we +% have to reset the switch to false first. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@endpefalse + \everypar{} + \par + } + \everypar{{\setbox\z@\lastbox} + \everypar{} + \@endpefalse + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% By default we don't do any tagging: +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_doendpe: \prg_do_nothing: +% \end{macrocode} +% The flag itself should be set globally not locally.\fmi{verify +% that this claim is actually correct!} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@endpetrue {\global\let\if@endpe\iftrue} +\def\@endpefalse{\global\let\if@endpe\iffalse} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Object and template interfaces} +% +% +% \begin{objecttype}{blockenv, block, para, list, item} +% All object types expect a single +% key--value argument used to tweak template parameters specific to a +% given use in the document. This section is devoted to template +% interfaces, and the template code is covered later. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareObjectType{blockenv}{1} +\DeclareObjectType{block}{1} +\DeclareObjectType{para}{1} +\DeclareObjectType{list}{1} +\DeclareObjectType{item}{1} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{objecttype} +% +% +% +% \begin{template}{blockenv display} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareTemplateInterface{blockenv}{display}{1} +{ + env-name : tokenlist , + tag-name : tokenlist , + tag-class : tokenlist , + tagging-recipe : tokenlist = standard, + level-increase : boolean = true , + setup-code : tokenlist , + block-instance : tokenlist = displayblock , + para-instance : tokenlist , + inner-level-counter : tokenlist, + max-inner-levels : tokenlist = 4, + inner-instance-type : tokenlist = list , + inner-instance : tokenlist , + para-flattened : boolean = false , + final-code : tokenlist = \ignorespaces , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{template} +% +% +% \begin{template}{block display} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareTemplateInterface{block}{display}{1} +{ + heading : tokenlist = , %?? + beginsep : skip = \topsep , + begin-par-skip : skip = \partopsep , + par-skip : skip = \parsep , + end-skip : skip = \KeyValue{beginsep} , % conflict with name below + end-par-skip : skip = \KeyValue{begin-par-skip} , + beginpenalty : integer = \UseName{@beginparpenalty} , + endpenalty : integer = \UseName{@endparpenalty} , + leftmargin : length = \leftmargin , + rightmargin : length = \rightmargin , + parindent : length = \listparindent , +% font : tokenlist % maybe add? (or more general for fonts and color) +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{template} +% +% +% \begin{template}{para std} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareTemplateInterface{para}{std}{1} +{ + indent-width : length = \parindent , + start-skip : skip = 0pt , + left-skip : skip = 0pt , + right-skip : skip = 0pt , + end-skip : skip = \@flushglue , + fixed-word-spaces : boolean = false , + final-hyphen-demerits : integer = 5000 , + cr-cmd : tokenlist = \@normalcr , + para-class : tokenlist = justify , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{template} +% +% +% \begin{template}{list std} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareTemplateInterface{list}{std}{1} % optional +{ + counter : tokenlist = , + item-label : tokenlist = , + start : integer = 1 , + resume : boolean = false , + item-instance : instance{item} = basic , + item-skip : skip = \itemsep , + item-penalty : integer = \UseName{@itempenalty} , + item-indent : length = 0pt , % was \itemindent + label-width : length = \labelwidth , + label-sep : length = \labelsep , + legacy-support : boolean = false , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{template} +% +% +% \begin{template}{item std} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareTemplateInterface{item}{std}{1} + { + counter-label : function{1} = \arabic{#1} , + counter-ref : function{1} = \KeyValue{counter-label} , + label-ref : function{1} = #1 , + label-autoref : function{1} = item~#1 , + label-format : function{1} = #1 , + label-strut : boolean = false , + label-align : choice {left,center,right,parleft} = right , + label-boxed : boolean = true , + next-line : boolean = false , + text-font : tokenlist , + compatibility : boolean = true , + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{template} +% +% +% +% +% +% +% \subsection{Useful helper commands} +% +% This section collects \pkg{expl3} commands that will be useful. +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_skip_set_to_last:N,\@@_skip_remove_last:} +% Set a skiip register to the value of an immediately preceding +% skip or zero if there was none +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_skip_set_to_last:N #1 { + \skip_set:Nn #1 { \tex_lastskip:D } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% Remove a skip previous skip if it is directly in front (not +% allowed in unrestricted vertical mode). +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_skip_remove_last: \tex_unskip:D +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\tl_if_novalue:nTF} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_if_novalue:nTF { o } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\tag_if_active:T} +% If tagging support is not loaded then we shouldn't try to execute +% any tagging related commands. Eventually this can go once the +% basic support is available in the kernel. +% \fmi{can vanish one day} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_if_exist:NF \tag_if_active:T + { \cs_new_eq:NN \tag_if_active:T \use_none:n } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Debugging} +% +% +% \begin{variable}{\g_@@_debug_bool} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\bool_new:N \g_@@_debug_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_debug:n,\@@_debug_typeout:n} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_debug:n \use_none:n +\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_debug_typeout:n \use_none:n +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\block_debug_on:,\block_debug_off:, +% \@@_debug_gset:} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \block_debug_on: + { + \bool_gset_true:N \g_@@_debug_bool + \@@_debug_gset: + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \block_debug_off: + { + \bool_gset_false:N \g_@@_debug_bool + \@@_debug_gset: + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_debug_gset: + { + \cs_gset_protected:Npx \@@_debug:n ##1 + { \bool_if:NT \g_@@_debug_bool {##1} } + \cs_gset_protected:Npx \@@_debug_typeout:n ##1 + { \bool_if:NT \g_@@_debug_bool { \typeout{==>~ ##1} } } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\DebugBlocksOn,\DebugBlocksOff} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \DebugBlocksOn { \block_debug_on: } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \DebugBlocksOff { \block_debug_off: } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DebugBlocksOff +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Implementation of the document-level block environments} +% +% Most such environments are pretty simple: they take an option +% argument and call a \texttt{blockenv} instance to do the work. At +% the end of environment we call \cs{endblockenv} to finish. +% +% +% \subsubsection{Displayblock environments} +% +% +% There are two basic block environment which are similar to +% \LaTeXe{}'s \env{trivlist} except that there aren't degenerated +% lists and thus have no hidden \cs{item} inside. +% +% +% \begin{environment}{displayblock} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\NewDocumentEnvironment{displayblock}{ !O{} } + { \UseInstance{blockenv}{displayblock} {#1} } + { \endblockenv } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% +% +% +% +% \begin{environment}{displayblockflattened} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\NewDocumentEnvironment{displayblockflattened}{ !O{} } + { \UseInstance{blockenv}{displayblockflattened} {#1} } + { \endblockenv } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% +% +% +% +% +% +% +% +% \begin{environment}{center,flushleft,flushright} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{ + \RenewDocumentEnvironment{center} { !O{} } + { \UseInstance{blockenv}{center}{#1} } + { \endblockenv } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \RenewDocumentEnvironment{flushright} { !O{} } + { \UseInstance{blockenv}{flushright}{#1} } + { \endblockenv } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \RenewDocumentEnvironment{flushleft} { !O{} } + { \UseInstance{blockenv}{flushleft}{#1} } + { \endblockenv } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \end{environment} +% +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Display quote environments} +% +% +% \begin{environment}{quote,quotation} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{ + \RenewDocumentEnvironment{quote}{ !O{} } + { \UseInstance{blockenv}{quote} {#1} } + { \endblockenv } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \RenewDocumentEnvironment{quotation}{ !O{} } + { \UseInstance{blockenv}{quotation} {#1} } + { \endblockenv } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% +% +% +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Verbatim environments} +% +% +% \begin{environment}{verbatim,verbatim*} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{ + \RenewDocumentEnvironment{verbatim}{ !O{} } + { \UseInstance{blockenv}{verbatim} {#1} +% \end{macrocode} +% This is the part of the code where \env{verbatim} +% and\env{verbatim*} differ. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@setupverbinvisiblespace\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces + \@xverbatim + } + { \endblockenv } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \RenewDocumentEnvironment{verbatim*}{ !O{} } + { \UseInstance{blockenv}{verbatim} {#1} + \@setupverbvisiblespace\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces + \@sxverbatim + } + { \endblockenv } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% +% +% +% \paragraph{Helper commands for verbatim} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\legacyverbatimsetup} +% +% This code resembles the \LaTeXe{} verbatim implementation with a +% slight twist: in \LaTeXe{} each code line was a paragraph using +% \cs{leftskip}=\cs{@totalleftmargin}. This was possible because +% the whole environment was implemented as a trivlist. As this is +% no longer the case setting \cs{leftskip} would alter the layout +% of a surrounding list. So instead we need to make sure that the +% paragraph end is executed in a group so that any parshape setup +% is preserved. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<@@=> +\def\legacyverbatimsetup{% + \language\l@nohyphenation + \@tempswafalse + \def\par{% + \if@tempswa + \leavevmode \null {\@@par}\penalty\interlinepenalty + \else + \@tempswatrue + \ifhmode{\@@par}\penalty\interlinepenalty\fi + \fi}% + \let\do\@makeother \dospecials + \obeylines \verbatim@font \@noligs + \everypar \expandafter{\the\everypar \unpenalty}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_set:Nn \l__tag_para_main_tag_tl {codeline} + \tagtool{paratag=Code}% oder faster: \tl_set:Nn\l__tag_para_tag_tl{Code} +} +%<@@=block> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@setupverbinvisiblespace} +% In the \pdfTeX{} engine we need to use \cs{pdffakespace} chars +% for the invisible spaces. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\@setupverbinvisiblespace{} +\tag_if_active:T { + \bool_if:NF\g__tag_mode_lua_bool + { + \renewcommand\@setupverbinvisiblespace{\def\@xobeysp{\nobreakspace\pdffakespace}} + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Standard list environments} +% +% +% \begin{environment}{itemize,enumerate,description} +% +% For the standard lists everything is managed by the blockenv instance. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{ + \RenewDocumentEnvironment{itemize}{!O{}} + { \UseInstance{blockenv}{itemize} {#1} } + { \endblockenv } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \RenewDocumentEnvironment{enumerate}{!O{}} + { \UseInstance{blockenv}{enumerate} {#1} } + { \endblockenv } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \RenewDocumentEnvironment{description}{!O{}} + { \UseInstance{blockenv}{description} {#1} } + { \endblockenv } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% +% +% +% +% +% +% \begin{environment}{list} +% +% The legacy 2e list environment is more complicated as we have to get the +% extra arguments accounted for. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{ + \RenewDocumentEnvironment{list}{O{} m m } + { +% \end{macrocode} +% We do this by storing them away and then call the list +% instance. Inside this instance the \texttt{setup-code} key +% contains \cs{legacylistsetupcode}, which makes use of the stored values. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_set:Nn \@itemlabel {#2} + \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_legacy_env_params_tl {#3} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \UseInstance{blockenv}{list} {#1} + } + { \endblockenv } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Again something that should probably elsewhere: the rolemapping. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tag_if_active:T { + \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=list,role=L}} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% +% +% +% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_env_params_tl} +% Declare the variable for the parameter argument; \cs{@itemlabel} +% is already declared in \LaTeXe{}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_env_params_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\legacylistsetupcode} +% +% And here is the extra code for use in the list instance setup +% inside the key \texttt{setup-code}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \legacylistsetupcode { +% \end{macrocode} +% Reset values to defaults: +% \begin{macrocode} + \dim_zero:N \listparindent + \dim_zero:N \rightmargin + \dim_zero:N \itemindent +% \end{macrocode} +% +% By default a \env{list} environment is not numbered: +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_set:Nn \@listctr {} + \legacy_if_set_false:n { @nmbrlist } % needed if lists are nested +% \end{macrocode} +% By default there is a simple definition for \cs{makelabel}. It can be +% overwritten in the second mandatory argument to the list +% environment (stored in \cs{l_@@_legacy_env_params_tl}) and +% is used if the instance sets the compatibility key to true. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\makelabel\@mklab % TODO: customize +% \end{macrocode} +% Now we use the argument with parameter settings to update some or +% all of the above defaults: +% \begin{macrocode} + \l_@@_legacy_env_params_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% As we don't know much about this list we can only make a guess about +% the nature of the list and the setting of the tag name (default +% \texttt{list} rolemapped to \texttt{L}) and any tag attributes +% may have to be overwritten in the optional key/value argument. But we do have some hints to play with. +% \begin{macrocode} + \legacy_if:nTF { @nmbrlist } + { \tl_set:Nn \l__tag_L_attr_class_tl {enumerate} } % numbered list + { \tl_if_empty:NTF \@itemlabel + { \tl_set:Nn \l__tag_L_attr_class_tl {list} } % no label + { \tl_set:Nn \l__tag_L_attr_class_tl {itemize} } % unnumbered, unordered + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% \begin{environment}{trivlist} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{ + \RenewDocumentEnvironment{trivlist}{ !O{} } + { \list[#1]{} + { + \dim_zero:N \leftmargin + \dim_zero:N \labelwidth + \cs_set_eq:NN \makelabel \use:n + } + } + { \endblockenv } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% +% +% \subsubsection{Theorem-like environments} +% +% Theorem-like environments are defined in \LaTeX{} with the help of +% \cs{newtheorem} declarations. Internally they used a list with a +% single item. Using lists was convenient back then, but in a tagged +% document you end up with a strange structure. We therefore alter the +% mechanism. +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\newtheorem} +% This is a slightly streamlined version of \cs{newtheorem}, but it +% still uses a lot of the 2e code for now. Eventually this will change. +% \begin{macrocode} +\RenewDocumentCommand \newtheorem { m O{#1} m o } +{ + \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname + { + \str_if_eq:nnTF{#1}{#2} + { + \@definecounter {#2} + \IfNoValueTF {#4} + { % @ynthm + \tl_gset:cx { the #2 } + { + \@thmcounter{#2} + } + } + { % @xnthm + \@newctr{#1}[#4] + \tl_gset:cx { the #2 } + { + \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#4\endcsname + \@thmcountersep + \@thmcounter{#2} + } + } + } + { % @othm + \@ifundefined{c@#2} + { \@nocounterr{#2} } + { + \tl_gset:cn { the #1 } + { \UseName { the #2 } } + } + } + \global\@namedef{#1} { \@thm{#2}{#3} } + \global\@namedef{end#1}{ \@endtheorem } + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@begintheorem,\@opargbegintheorem} +% +% The \cs{@thm} command expands to either \cs{@beginthorem} or +% \cs{@opargbegintheorem}. For the moment we stick with this as it +% will help with the transion. But instead of using a +% \env{trivlist} we use a blockenv and some tagging for the title +% (as a Caption). +% We do not want potential tagging from \cs{textbf} here, +% so we use \cs{bfseries} to set the font. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@begintheorem#1#2{ + \UseInstance{blockenv}{theorem}{} + \tagpdfparaOff + \mode_leave_vertical: + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Caption} + \group_begin: + \bfseries + \tag_mc_begin:n {} + #1\ + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Lbl} + \tag_mc_begin:n {} + #2 + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_end: + \group_end: + \tag_struct_end: + \tagpdfparaOn +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_start_para_structure_unconditionally:n { \PARALABEL } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \itshape + \hskip\labelsep + \ignorespaces +} +\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{ + \UseInstance{blockenv}{theorem}{} + \tagpdfparaOff + \mode_leave_vertical: + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Caption} + \group_begin: + \bfseries + \tag_mc_begin:n {} + #1\ + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Lbl} + \tag_mc_begin:n {} + #2 + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_end: + \tag_mc_begin:n {} + \ (#3) + \tag_mc_end: + \group_end: + \tag_struct_end: + \tagpdfparaOn +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_start_para_structure_unconditionally:n { \PARALABEL } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \itshape + \hskip\labelsep + \ignorespaces +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@endtheorem{\endblockenv} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% +% +% \subsection{Implementation of templates} +% +% +% \subsubsection{Implementation of blockenv templates \ldots} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\g_block_nesting_depth_int} +% \LaTeXe{} already has a counter to record the nesting depth of +% blocks, but we want our own name because it isn't really tied to +% \enquote{lists} any more. However, \cs{@listdepth} is really part +% of the legacy interface (for example \env{minipage} alters it to +% point to a different counter) so that we are stuck with using at +% least indirectly for now and the following line makes this look +% like an L3 integer variable but internally expands to \cs{@listdepth}: +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \g_block_nesting_depth_int { \@listdepth } % a fake int + % for now +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{template}{blockenv display} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareTemplateCode{blockenv}{display}{1} +{ + env-name = \l_@@_env_name_tl , + tag-name = \l_@@_tag_name_tl , + tag-class = \l_@@_tag_class_tl , + tagging-recipe = \l_@@_tagging_recipe_tl , + level-increase = \l_@@_level_incr_bool , + setup-code = \l_@@_setup_code_tl , + block-instance = \l_@@_block_instance_tl , + para-instance = \l_@@_para_instance_tl , + inner-level-counter = \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl , + max-inner-levels = \l_@@_max_inner_levels_tl , + inner-instance-type = \l_@@_inner_instance_type_tl , + inner-instance = \l_@@_inner_instance_tl , + para-flattened = \l__tag_para_flattened_bool , + final-code = \l_@@_final_code_tl , +} +{ + \@@_debug_typeout:n{\l_@@_env_name_tl -env-start} +% + \tl_if_empty:nF {#1} { \SetTemplateKeys{blockenv}{display}{#1} } +% +% \end{macrocode} +% We need to know later if we haved nested blockenvs inside +% a flattened environment. Whenever we start a new blockenv we +% increment \cs{\l_@@_flattened_level_int} if it is already +% different from zero. If it is zero we increment it if flattening +% is requested. +% Thus a value of \texttt{0} means no flattening requested so far +% and \texttt{1} means this is the first blockenv requesting +% flattening. In either case we have to make sure that the blockenv +% is surrounded by a \texttt{text-unit} tag, while for any value above +% \texttt{1} we have to omit the \texttt{text-unit}. + % \begin{macrocode} + \int_compare:nNnTF \l_@@_flattened_level_int > 0 + { + \int_incr:N \l_@@_flattened_level_int + } + { + \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_flattened_bool + { + \int_incr:N \l_@@_flattened_level_int + } + } +% + \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl + { + \int_compare:nNnTF \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl > + { \l_@@_max_inner_levels_tl - 1 } + { \@toodeep } + { \int_incr:N \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl } % not clean "o"? + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Legacy defaults are only roped in if the list level changes. For +% display blocks that remain on the same level the current values +% are kept. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bool_if:NT \l_@@_level_incr_bool + { + \int_compare:nNnTF \g_block_nesting_depth_int > + { \c@maxblocklevels - 1 } + { \@toodeep } + { + \int_gincr:N \g_block_nesting_depth_int +% \end{macrocode} +% If there are no legacy defaults for that level then the next line +% does nothing, i.e., the current values (from the last level +% become the defaults for the next. +% \begin{macrocode} + \use:c { @list \int_to_roman:n { \g_block_nesting_depth_int } } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% If we are doing tagging we load one of the available recipes for +% tagging, which alters various kernel hooks to add appropriate +% tagging structures. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_if_active:T { \use:c { @@_recipe_ \l_@@_tagging_recipe_tl : } } +% \end{macrocode} +% Then run the setup code if any is given in the instance. +% \begin{macrocode} + \l_@@_setup_code_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% Next call a block instance at the appropriate level passing it +% any key/value list provided in the optional argument (keys that +% are not recognized are ignored---currently with an +% error). +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_debug_typeout:n{use~ instance:~ + \l_@@_block_instance_tl - \int_use:N \g_block_nesting_depth_int } + \UseInstance{block} + { \l_@@_block_instance_tl - \int_use:N + \g_block_nesting_depth_int } + {#1} +% \end{macrocode} +% After the block instance call the para and then inner (list) +% instance if either or both are +% specified (which may not be the case). +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_para_instance_tl + { + \@@_debug_typeout:n{use~ para~ instance:~ \l_@@_para_instance_tl } +% \end{macrocode} +% For now we don't offer to alter instance parameters here so we +% pass an empty argument. +% \begin{macrocode} + \UseInstance{para}{ \l_@@_para_instance_tl } {} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% In the inner instance may have its own levels or none depending +% on which the instance name differs. Again we pass it the optional +% key/value list. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_inner_instance_tl + { + \@@_debug_typeout:n{use~ instance:~ \l_@@_inner_instance_tl + \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl + { - \int_use:N \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl }} + \UseInstance{ \l_@@_inner_instance_type_tl } + { \l_@@_inner_instance_tl + \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl + { - \int_use:N \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl } % not clean + % use "o"? + } + {#1} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% We finish off with \cs{l_@@_final_code_tl} which defaults to +% \cs{ignorespaces} so that spaces between \verb=\begin{...}= and +% the start of the text are ignored. +% \begin{macrocode} + \l_@@_final_code_tl +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{template} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_flattened_level_int} +% Count the levels of nested blockenvs starting with the first that +% is \enquote{flattened}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\int_new:N \l_@@_flattened_level_int +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\c@maxblocklevels} +% A counter to increase or decrease the number of supported +% level. If increased, one needs to suply additional level instances. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcounter{maxblocklevels} +\setcounter{maxblocklevels}{6} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\endblockenv} +% The code executed when a blockenv ends is 99\% the same for all +% blockenvs (at least up to now). Small differences exist, though. They +% are accounted for first in the conditionals. +% +% We make this a public command so that new block environments can +% be set up without the need to resort to L3 layer +% programming.\fmi{name is bad} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \endblockenv { + \@@_debug_typeout:n{blockenv~ common~ ending \on@line} +% \end{macrocode} +% If this block was incrementing the level we have to decrement it +% now again: +% \begin{macrocode} + \bool_if:NT \l_@@_level_incr_bool + { \int_gdecr:N \g_block_nesting_depth_int } +% \end{macrocode} +% If this block was a list and there are still \cs{item} labels to +% be placed we move to horizontal mode to get them typeset. +% \begin{macrocode} + \legacy_if:nT { @inlabel } + { + \mode_leave_vertical: + \legacy_if_gset_false:n { @inlabel } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% In a pure ``displayblock'' scenario \texttt{@newlist} will be +% always false and the code bypassed, but we may have an outer list +% followed immediately by a displayblock (with the \cs{item} missing) +% \begin{macrocode} + \legacy_if:nT { @newlist } + { + \@noitemerr + \legacy_if_gset_false:n { @newlist } + } + \mode_if_horizontal:TF + { \@@_skip_remove_last: \@@_skip_remove_last: \par } + { \@inmatherr{\end{\@currenvir}} } +% \end{macrocode} +% Once we are back in vertical mode we can add the appropriate +% closing tagging structure(s), if we are doing tagging. +% \begin{macrocode} + \__kernel_displayblock_end: +% \end{macrocode} +% What to do in terms of vertical spacing in different situations +% is still somewhat open to debate, right now this is more or less +% implementing what \LaTeXe{} list environment have been +% doing.\fmi{some redesign/extensions here?} +% \begin{macrocode} +% \@@_debug_typeout:n{@noparlist = +% \legacy_if:nTF { @noparlist }{true}{false}} + \legacy_if:nF { @noparlist } + { + \@@_skip_set_to_last:N \l_tmpa_skip + \dim_compare:nNnT \l_tmpa_skip > \c_zero_dim + { + \skip_vertical:n { - \l_tmpa_skip } + \skip_vertical:n { \l_tmpa_skip + \parskip - \@outerparskip } + } + \addpenalty \@endparpenalty + \addvspace \l_@@_topsepadd_skip +% \end{macrocode} +% \LaTeXe{} triggered the paragraph handling after a list at this +% point here, i.e., only if the list didn't start a paragraph. One +% can make a case for that, but it can be somewhat surprising to +% the user and there is a good argument that even such a list could +% be followed expanatory text that is part of the same paragraph +% and doesn't start a new one.\fmi{decide which logic we want to +% use! If the old logic is used we need to close the text-unit +% ourselves in the true branch} +% \begin{macrocode} +% \legacy_if_gset_true:n { @endpe } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% So this is for now always done. Probably \cs{l_@@_topsepadd_skip} above +% should be added only if the paragraph ends here and not if it +% continues, so this need some further cleanup.\fmi{decide} + % \begin{macrocode} + \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_standalone_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% It is possible that \texttt{@endpe} is true because a +% displayblock has just ended before we end the standalone +% displayblock and in that casevthere is no outer +% \struct{text-unit} so we have to explicitly set \texttt{@endpe} +% back to false to prevent it from closing a structure later that +% isn't there. +% \begin{macrocode} + { \legacy_if_gset_false:n { @endpe } } + { \legacy_if_gset_true:n { @endpe } } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_displayblock_end:} +% The kernel hook for tagging at the end of the block. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \__kernel_displayblock_end: { + \@@_debug_typeout:n{\detokenize{__kernel_displayblock_end:}} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_standalone_bool} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\bool_new:N \l_@@_standalone_bool +\bool_set_false:N \l_@@_standalone_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Implementation of para templates \ldots} +% +% \begin{template}{para std} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareTemplateCode{para}{std}{1} +{ + indent-width = \parindent , + start-skip = \l__par_start_skip , % name?? + left-skip = \leftskip , + right-skip = \rightskip , + end-skip = \parfillskip , + fixed-word-spaces = \l__par_fixed_word_spaces_bool , % name?? + final-hyphen-demerits = \finalhyphendemerits , + cr-cmd = \\ , + para-class = \l_tag_para_attr_class_tl , +} +{ + \tl_if_empty:nF {#1} { \SetTemplateKeys{para}{std}{#1} } + \skip_set:Nn \@rightskip \rightskip +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{template} +% +% +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Implementation of block templates \ldots} +% +% +% +% +% +% \begin{template}{block display} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareTemplateCode{block}{display}{1} +{ + heading = \l_@@_heading_tl , + beginsep = \topsep , + begin-par-skip = \partopsep , + par-skip = \parsep , + end-skip = \l_@@_botsep_skip , + end-par-skip = \l_@@_parbotsep_skip , + beginpenalty = \@beginparpenalty , + endpenalty = \@endparpenalty , + rightmargin = \rightmargin , + leftmargin = \leftmargin , + parindent = \listparindent , +} +{ + \tl_if_empty:nF {#1} { \SetTemplateKeys{block}{display}{#1} } +% \end{macrocode} +% \fmi{generalize heading usage (or drop?)} +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_blank:oF \l_@@_heading_tl + { \mode_leave_vertical: \textbf{\l_@@_heading_tl} } % TODO customize +% \end{macrocode} +% The code largely follows the logic of \LaTeXe{}'s \env{trivlist} +% implementation as far as it applicable for the \enquote{display +% block} but coded using the L3 programming layer. However, we keep +% all the legacy variables (e.g., \texttt{@noskipsec}) if there is +% some chance that they are set in classes or packages. +% \begin{macrocode} + \legacy_if:nT { @noskipsec } { \mode_leave_vertical: } + \skip_set:Nn \l_@@_topsepadd_skip { \topsep } + \mode_if_vertical:TF + { + \skip_add:Nn \l_@@_topsepadd_skip { \partopsep } +% \end{macrocode} +% At this point it is safe to add tagging structure(s) so we have +% a kernel-owned hook here for tagging. This is used to possibly +% start a paragraph structure (to surround the block, for example, +% in case of lists) and possibly do some other preparation for +% tagging the block. +% \begin{macrocode} + \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_vmode: + } + { +% \end{macrocode} +% If we are in horizontal mode then the displayblock has to return +% to vertical mode now (after removing any immediately preceding +% skip or kern. But before we actually issue the\cs{par} we execute +% a kernel hook in which we can add tagging code. This hook is +% \enquote{weird} because by default it does nothing, but if +% tagging is wanted it takes an argument and grabs the following +% \cs{par} in order to put tagging code before and after the \cs{par}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_skip_remove_last: \@@_skip_remove_last: + \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_hmode:w \par + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Now we are back to legacy list implementation \ldots +% \begin{macrocode} + \legacy_if:nTF { @inlabel } + { + \legacy_if_set_true:n { @noparitem } + \legacy_if_set_true:n { @noparlist } + } + { + \legacy_if:nT { @newlist } { \@noitemerr } + \legacy_if_set_false:n { @noparlist } + \skip_set_eq:NN \l_@@_effective_top_skip \l_@@_topsepadd_skip + } + \skip_add:Nn \l_@@_effective_top_skip { \parskip } +% \end{macrocode} +% Next lines set some paragraph defaults, this may get overwritten +% if there is a \key{para-instance} specified on the \xt{blockenv}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \skip_zero:N \leftskip + \skip_set_eq:NN \rightskip \@rightskip + \skip_set_eq:NN \parfillskip \@flushglue +% \end{macrocode} +% The next lines establish a parshape which is retained across +% paragraphs be executing \cs{para_end:} within a group and thus +% reestablishing the parshape for the next paragraph again. In case +% a list got started \cs{par} is ignored until we have seen an +% \cs{item} (or we have executed \cs{par} one thousand times. +% \begin{macrocode} + \int_zero:N \par@deathcycles + \@setpar + { + \legacy_if:nTF { @newlist } + { + \int_incr:N \par@deathcycles + \int_compare:nNnTF \par@deathcycles > { 1000 } + { \@noitemerr + { \para_end: } + } + } + { + { \para_end: } + } + } + \skip_set_eq:NN \@outerparskip \parskip + \skip_set_eq:NN \parskip \parsep + \dim_set_eq:NN \parindent \listparindent + \dim_add:Nn \linewidth { - \rightmargin - \leftmargin } + \dim_add:Nn \@totalleftmargin { \leftmargin } + \tex_parshape:D 1 ~ \@totalleftmargin \linewidth +% \end{macrocode} +% This is the point where we are ready to add the tagging structure +% for the block, e.g., an \verb=<L>=, a \verb=<Figure>= or some +% other structure. +% \begin{macrocode} + \__kernel_displayblock_begin: +% \end{macrocode} +% Finally, we have to output the vertical separation and penalty at +% the start of the block and make corrections for a change in +% \cs{parskip} and some other housekeeping, unless this block is inside a list and the list +% \cs{item} has not yet placed. In that case the vertical +% space and penalty us suppressed. This +% is controled through the legacy switches \texttt{@noparitem}, +% \texttt{minipage}, and \texttt{@nobreak}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \legacy_if:nTF { @noparitem } + { + \legacy_if_set_false:n { @noparitem } + \hbox_gset:Nn \g_@@_labels_box + { + \skip_horizontal:n { - \leftmargin } + \hbox_unpack_drop:N \g_@@_labels_box + \skip_horizontal:n { \leftmargin } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \fmi{document 2e logic used here} +% \begin{macrocode} + \legacy_if:nF { @minipage } % Why this chunk of code? + { + \@@_skip_set_to_last:N \l_@@_tmpa_skip + \skip_vertical:n { - \l_@@_tmpa_skip } + \skip_vertical:n { \l_@@_tmpa_skip + \@outerparskip - \parskip } + } + } + { + \legacy_if:nTF { @nobreak } + { \addvspace{\skip_eval:n{\@outerparskip-\parskip}} } + { + \addpenalty \@beginparpenalty + \addvspace \l_@@_effective_top_skip + \addvspace{-\parskip} + } + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% Extra keys to support enumitem conventions: +% \begin{macrocode} +\keys_define:nn { template/block/display } +{ + ,topsep .skip_set:N = \topsep + ,partopsep .skip_set:N = \partopsep + ,listparindent .skip_set:N = \listparindent +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{template} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_displayblock_begin:, +% \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_hmode:w, +% \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_vmode:} +% The internal kernel hooks for tagging. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \__kernel_displayblock_begin: { + \@@_debug_typeout:n{\detokenize{__kernel_displayblock_begin:}} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_hmode:w { + \@@_debug_typeout:n{\detokenize{__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_hmode:w}} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_vmode: { + \@@_debug_typeout:n{\detokenize{__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_vmode:}} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Implementation of list templates \ldots} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@itemlabel,\@listctr} +% Both \cs{@itemlabel} and \cs{@listctr} from the \LaTeXe{} list +% implementation are used (or set) by various packages. We +% therefore use them too, so that these packages have a fighting +% chance to work with the new tagging-aware implementation for +% \env{list}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \@itemlabel % should have a top-level definition +\tl_new:N \@listctr % should have a top-level definition +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% +% \begin{template}{list std} +% +% This template implements numbered and unnumbered lists and can +% be combined with display blocks or with inline blocks. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareTemplateCode{list}{std}{1} +{ + counter = \l_@@_counter_tl, + item-label = \l_@@_item_label_tl, + start = \l_@@_counter_start_int , + resume = \l_@@_resume_bool , + item-instance = \@@_item_instance:n , + item-skip = \itemsep , +% item-par-skip = \parsep , + item-penalty = \@itempenalty , + item-indent = \itemindent , + label-width = \labelwidth , + label-sep = \labelsep , + legacy-support = \l_@@_legacy_support_bool , % FMi questionable +} +{ + \@@_debug_typeout:n{template:list:std} +% + \tl_if_empty:nF {#1} { \SetTemplateKeys{list}{std}{#1} } +% \end{macrocode} +% Has this list a counter name defined in the instance? +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_empty:NTF \l_@@_counter_tl + { +% \end{macrocode} +% If not we check if \cs{@listctr} has a non-empty value to be used +% for the list counter. +% +% We better test for blank not empty in case somebody had defined +% \cs{@listctr} using \cs{renewcommand} or \cs{cs_set:Npn}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_blank:oF \@listctr + { +% \end{macrocode} +% In that case \texttt{@nmbrlist} should have been set too, for +% example, through \cs{usecounter}, so we do not set it +% explicitly. However, we check if we should resume a previous list. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bool_if:NF \l_@@_resume_bool + { + \int_gset:cn{ c@ \@listctr } + { \l_@@_counter_start_int - 1 } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% If \cs{@listctr} is not set then we have definitely an unnumbered list. +% \begin{macrocode} + { \@nmbrlistfalse } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% If a counter is set in the list instance we use that +% one. This should be the name of a \LaTeX{} counter that is +% already allocated externally---no runtime check is made for this: +% if it is not declared one will get \enquote{no such counter} +% error when the list is used. +% \begin{macrocode} + { + \@nmbrlisttrue + \tl_set_eq:NN \@listctr \l_@@_counter_tl + \bool_if:NF \l_@@_resume_bool + { + \int_gset:cn{ c@ \@listctr } + { \l_@@_counter_start_int - 1 } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Does the current instance has an item label representation? This +% would be possible whether or not we have a numbered list. If yes, +% then we use this for \cs{@itemlabel}, otherwise we expect that +% \cs{@itemlabel} is provided from the outside, e.g., as part of +% the \env{list} environment argument. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_item_label_tl + { + \tl_set_eq:NN \@itemlabel \l_@@_item_label_tl + } +% \end{macrocode} +% finally, we signal that we are at the start of a new list (which +% effects how the first \cs{item} is handled and how \cs{par} +% commands are interpreted. +% \begin{macrocode} + \legacy_if_gset_true:n { @newlist } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_debug_typeout:n{template:list:std~end} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% Extra keys to support enumitem conventions: +% \begin{macrocode} +\keys_define:nn { template/list/std } +{ + ,nosep .code:n = + \dim_zero:N \itemsep + \dim_zero:N \parsep + \dim_zero:N \topsep + \dim_zero:N \l_@@_botsep_skip + \dim_zero:N \l_@@_parbotsep_skip + ,midsep .skip_set:N = \topsep +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{template} +% +% +% \subsubsection{Implementation of \cs{item} template(s)} +% +% +% +% \begin{template}{item std} +% The item template has one hidden key \texttt{label} which is not available on the +% template for setting because it is only used to receive any +% optional data passed to the \cs{item} command. We therefore +% declare it with \cs{keys_define:nn} and ensure that the optional +% argument data to \cs{item} (if it is not a key/value list +% already) is passed to this \texttt{label} key. +% \begin{macrocode} +\keys_define:nn { template/item/std } + { label .tl_set:N = \l_@@_label_given_tl } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \fmi{alignment is mostly wrong (test short medium and multiline +% labels)} +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareTemplateCode{item}{std}{1} + { + counter-label = \@@_counter_label:n , + counter-ref = \@@_counter_ref:n , +% \end{macrocode} +% \fmi{next set of key not yet used} +% \begin{macrocode} + label-ref = \@@_label_ref:n , + label-autoref = \@@_label_autoref:n , + label-format = \@@_label_format:n , + label-strut = \l_@@_label_strut_bool , + label-boxed = \l_@@_label_boxed_bool , + next-line = \l_@@_next_line_bool , + text-font = \l_@@_text_font_tl , + compatibility = \l_@@_item_compatibility_bool , +% \end{macrocode} +% This probably needs a different implementation (and needs completing)\fmi{complete} +% \begin{macrocode} + label-align = { + left = \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_item_align_tl { \relax \hss } , + center = \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_item_align_tl { \hss \hss } , + right = \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_item_align_tl { \hss \relax } , + parleft = \NOT_IMPLEMENTED , + } , + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Then typeset the label at its natural width by applying +% \cs{@@_make_label_box:n} to the label given or to a label constructed +% from the counter. If it is boxed and reasonably short, add padding to +% make it at least of size \tn{labelwidth}, then add another layer of +% box. This way, when we unpack it in \cs{g_@@_labels_box} it correctly +% remains boxed in those cases. Afterwards, in the \texttt{nextline} +% case add \tn{newline} if the label did not fit in the allotted space. +% \begin{macrocode} + { + \@@_debug_typeout:n{template:item:std} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% First deal with the key--value input, which in particular may +% provide a value for the label (the usual optional argument of +% \cs{item}). For this we set \cs{l_@@_label_given_tl} to +% \cs{c_novalue_tl} so that we can identify if an optional argument +% was given. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_set_eq:NN \l_@@_label_given_tl \c_novalue_tl + \tl_if_empty:nF{#1}{ \SetTemplateKeys{item}{std}{#1} } +% \end{macrocode} +% If no optional argument was given then \cs{l_@@_label_given_tl} +% is still equal to \cs{c_novalue_tl} and so we can distinuish +% that from \verb=\item[]=. +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_novalue:oTF \l_@@_label_given_tl + { +% \end{macrocode} +% The rest of the code for this template needs work and is both +% incomplete and partly wrong.\fmi{fix} +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_blank:oF \@listctr { \@kernel@refstepcounter \@listctr } + \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_item_compatibility_bool % not sure that conditional + % makes sense + { \@@_make_label_box:n { \MakeLinkTarget[\@listctr]{}\@itemlabel } } % TODO ? + { \@@_make_label_box:n { \MakeLinkTarget[\@listctr]{}\@@_counter_label:n { \@listctr } } } + } + { + \@@_debug_typeout:n{item~ with~ optional} + \@@_make_label_box:n { \l_@@_label_given_tl } } + \bool_if:nT + { + \l_@@_label_boxed_bool + && \dim_compare_p:n { \box_wd:N \l_@@_one_label_box <= \linewidth } % TODO: is \linewidth correct? + } + { + \dim_compare:nNnT + { \box_wd:N \l_@@_one_label_box } < \labelwidth + { + \hbox_set_to_wd:Nnn \l_@@_one_label_box { \labelwidth } + { + \exp_after:wN \use_i:nn \l_@@_item_align_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% FMi: \LaTeXe{} keeps the label boxed inside (not unboxed). This +% means that the content stays rigid and does not vary based on +% glue setting in the line with the label. +% There are cases where we do want the unboxed version (I think +% enumitem offers that in some cases too) but it should probably +% not the default. +% \begin{macrocode} +% \hbox_unpack_drop:N \l_@@_one_label_box %TODO: customize? + \box_use_drop:N \l_@@_one_label_box +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \exp_after:wN \use_ii:nn \l_@@_item_align_tl + } + } + \hbox_set:Nn \l_@@_one_label_box + { \box_use_drop:N \l_@@_one_label_box } + } + \dim_compare:nNnTF { \box_wd:N \l_@@_one_label_box } > \labelwidth + { \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_long_label_bool } + { \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_long_label_bool } + \hbox_gset:Nn \g_@@_labels_box + { + \hbox_unpack_drop:N \g_@@_labels_box + \skip_horizontal:n { \itemindent - \labelsep - \labelwidth } + \hbox_unpack_drop:N \l_@@_one_label_box + \skip_horizontal:n { \labelsep } + \bool_if:NT \l_@@_next_line_bool + { \bool_if:NT \l_@@_long_label_bool { \nobreak \hfil \break } } + % version of \newline inside an hbox that will be unpacked + } + % \skip_set_eq:NN \parsep \l_@@_item_parsep_skip TODO??? FMi + % what's that? + \dim_set_eq:NN \parindent \listparindent +% \end{macrocode} +% Placing the list label(s) is done when the paragraph for the +% \cs{item} is started, which executes \cs{@@_item_everypar:} +% inside \hook{para/begin}. By default this command does nothing, now we +% change it to attach the pending label or labels. +% \begin{macrocode} + \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_item_everypar: \@@_item_everypar_std: + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{template} +% +% +% +% +% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_one_label_box, \g_@@_labels_box} +% Each label is typeset in \cs{l_@@_one_label_box} to be measured. +% Once this is ready, it is put (boxed or unboxed) in +% \cs{g_@@_labels_box}, together with any pending labels (for the case +% where a list begins just after \tn{item}). This is an analogue of +% \LaTeXe{}'s \tn{@labels}, but it is always unboxed before use, to +% support both boxed and unboxed labels. +% \begin{macrocode} +\box_new:N \l_@@_one_label_box +\box_new:N \g_@@_labels_box +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_long_label_bool} +% Track whether the \cs{l_@@_one_label_box} is larger than +% \tn{labelwidth}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\bool_new:N \l_@@_long_label_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_make_label_box:n, \@@_label_format:x} +% Make one label, wrapped in \cs{@@_label_format:n}, with an +% appropriate \tn{strut} and possibly \tn{makelabel} in compatibility +% mode (used for the \env{list} environment). +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_make_label_box:n #1 + { + \hbox_set:Nn \l_@@_one_label_box + { +% \end{macrocode} +% If we do tagging then the contents of this box may need to be +% wrapped into a structure, e.g., \verb=<Lbl>=. +% \begin{macrocode} + \__kernel_list_label_begin: +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_label_format:n + { + \bool_if:NT \l_@@_label_strut_bool { \strut } + \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_legacy_support_bool + \makelabel + \use:n + {#1} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% And what gets opened also needs closing: +% \begin{macrocode} + \__kernel_list_label_end: + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_list_label_begin:, +% \__kernel_list_label_end:} +% If we aren't doing tagging the kernel hooks do nothing. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_eq:NN \__kernel_list_label_begin: \prg_do_nothing: +\cs_new_eq:NN \__kernel_list_label_end: \prg_do_nothing: +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_item_everypar:, \@@_item_everypar_std:} +% The \cs{@@_item_everypar:} command is executed as part of \hook{para/begin} +% but most of the time does nothing, i.e., it has the following +% default definition. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_item_everypar: \prg_do_nothing: +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{para/begin}[lists]{\@@_item_everypar:} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Note that we have to make sure that the above code is executed +% after the hook chunk from \texttt{tagpdf} because the latter uses +% \texttt{@inlabel} to make a decision. +% +% By the end of the day both should probably move into the kernel +% hook instead! +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareHookRule{para/begin}{lists}{after}{tagpdf} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% What follows is the version that resets various legacy booleans and puts +% the label box in the right place and finally resets itself to do +% nothing next time. \cs{@@_item_everypar:} is set to this by the +% item template so that the next paragraph start runs the code below. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_item_everypar_std: { + \@@_debug_typeout:n{item~ everypar \on@line } + \legacy_if_set_false:n { @minipage } + \legacy_if_gset_false:n { @newlist } + \legacy_if:nT { @inlabel } + { + \legacy_if_gset_false:n { @inlabel } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \box_if_empty:NT \g_para_indent_box { \kern - \itemindent } + \para_omit_indent: +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \box_use_drop:N \g_@@_labels_box +% \end{macrocode} +% After the labels are placed we start a paragraph structure (if +% appropriate). This is handled in the following kernel hook: +% \begin{macrocode} + \__kernel_list_label_after: +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \penalty \c_zero_int + } + \legacy_if:nTF { @nobreak } + { + \legacy_if_gset_false:n { @nobreak } + \int_set:Nn \clubpenalty { 10000 } + } + { + \int_set_eq:NN \clubpenalty \@clubpenalty +% \end{macrocode} +% Once the label(s) are typeset and we are past any special +% \texttt{@nobreak} handling we reset \cs{@@_item_everypar:} to do +% nothing. +% \begin{macrocode} + \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_item_everypar: \prg_do_nothing: + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_list_label_after:} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_eq:NN \__kernel_list_label_after: \prg_do_nothing: +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_tmpa_skip} +% \begin{macrocode} +\skip_new:N \l_@@_tmpa_skip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% +% +% +% +% +% +% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_topsepadd_skip, \l_@@_effective_top_skip} +% Variables equivalent to \LaTeXe{}'s \tn{@topsepadd} and \tn{@topsep}. +% Roughly equal to a mixture of \texttt{topsep}, \texttt{partopsep}, +% and various \texttt{parskip} at different nesting levels in lists. +% The code is really elaborate when \texttt{@inlabel} is true. +% \begin{macrocode} +\skip_new:N \l_@@_topsepadd_skip +\skip_new:N \l_@@_effective_top_skip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% +% +% +% +% +% +% +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\item} +% Here we already have all the building blocks. Complain in math +% mode. Distingusih between first item (do necessary tagging) and +% later items \cs{@@_inter_item:} to +% cleanly close what's before, then call \cs{@@_item_instance:n} (which +% calls \cs{UseInstance}\{item\}\marg{instance}) to prepare the +% upcoming item: it will be actually inserted only once some later +% material triggers \tn{everypar}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{ + \RenewDocumentCommand{\item}{ ={label}o } + { + \@inmatherr \item +% \end{macrocode} +% TODO: Test for being outside of a list needs updating! +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_empty:oTF \@@_item_instance:n %%FMi? + { \msg_error:nnn { @@ } { item-in-nonlist } { \item[{#1}] } } + { + \legacy_if:nTF { @newlist } + { \__kernel_list_item_begin: } + { \@@_inter_item: } +% \end{macrocode} +% To avoid unnecessary key/val processing we make a quick check if +% there was an optional argument. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_novalue:nTF {#1} % avoids reparsing label={} + { \@@_item_instance:n { } } + { \@@_item_instance:n {#1} } +% \end{macrocode} +% Set the legacy switch that signals that we have a pending item label: +% \begin{macrocode} + \legacy_if_gset_true:n { @inlabel } + \ignorespaces + } + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_inter_item:} +% Between items. If the previous item had no content then we need to +% trigger \tn{everypar}. Otherwise we simply close the previous item +% with \tn{par} after removing some horizontal space. Between items, +% there is a penalty and some space. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_inter_item: { + \legacy_if:nT { @inlabel } + { \indent \par } % case of \item\item +% \end{macrocode} +% \cs{par} may have a strange definition and may not get us back to +% vertical mode in one go, so we better do not treat the next line +% as an else case to the above conditional (for now). +% \begin{macrocode} + \mode_if_horizontal:T { \@@_skip_remove_last: + \@@_skip_remove_last: \par } +% \end{macrocode} +% End any LI-tag, then start the next LI-tag (if doing tagging): +% \begin{macrocode} + \__kernel_list_item_end: + \__kernel_list_item_begin: +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \addpenalty \@itempenalty + \addvspace \itemsep +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_list_item_begin:, +% \__kernel_list_item_end:} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_eq:NN \__kernel_list_item_begin: \prg_do_nothing: +\cs_new_eq:NN \__kernel_list_item_end: \prg_do_nothing: +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% +% +% +% +% \subsection{Tagging recipes} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_recipe_basic:} +% The \texttt{basic} recipe simply ensures that the block is inside +% a \texttt{text-unit} structure and if necessary starts one. When the +% block ends and is followed by a blank line the \texttt{text-unit} +% structure is closed too, otherwise it remains open and further +% text starts with just a \struct{text} structure. +% +% There is otherwise no inner structure so +% \cs{__kernel_displayblock_begin:} and +% \cs{__kernel_displayblock_end:} do nothing---blockenvs with inner +% structure use the \texttt{standard} or \texttt{list} recipe instead. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \@@_recipe_basic: { + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_hmode:w + \@@_beginpar_hmode:N + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_vmode: + \@@_beginpar_vmode: + \let \__kernel_displayblock_begin: \prg_do_nothing: + \let \__kernel_displayblock_end: \prg_do_nothing: +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_recipe_standalone:} +% +% The \texttt{standalone} recipe produces a block that ensures that +% a previous \texttt{text-unit} ends and that after the block a new +% \texttt{text-unit} starts. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \@@_recipe_standalone: { + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_hmode:w + \prg_do_nothing: + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_vmode: + \prg_do_nothing: + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_begin: \@@_inner_begin: + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_end: \@@_inner_end: +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_standalone_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_empty:NTF \l_@@_tag_name_tl + { \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_tag_inner_tag_tl {Sect} } + { \tl_set_eq:NN \l_@@_tag_inner_tag_tl \l_@@_tag_name_tl } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_recipe_standard:} +% The \texttt{standard} recipe does the following: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item surround the block with a \texttt{text-unit}-structure if not already in a +% a \texttt{text-unit}. In the latter case end the +% MC and the \struct{text} but leave the \texttt{text-unit} open. +% +% If we are producing flattened paragraphs, just close any +% \struct{text} but do not open a \texttt{text-unit}. +% +% \item Then open an new (inner) structure (by default +% \texttt{Figure} but typically the one specified on the instance). +% \item At the end of the block close the the inner structure +% (\texttt{Figure} or explicit one) +% but leave the \texttt{text-unit} open to be either continued or closed due to a +% following \cs{par}. +% \end{itemize} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \@@_recipe_standard: +{ + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_hmode:w + \@@_beginpar_hmode:N + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_vmode: + \@@_beginpar_vmode: + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_begin: \@@_inner_begin: + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_end: \@@_inner_end: +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_empty:NTF \l_@@_tag_name_tl + { \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_tag_inner_tag_tl {Figure} } + { \tl_set_eq:NN \l_@@_tag_inner_tag_tl \l_@@_tag_name_tl } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_tag_inner_tag_tl} +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_tag_inner_tag_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_recipe_list:} +% The \texttt{list} recipe does the following. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item It opens a \struct{text-unit}-structure or keeps the current one open (only +% closing the MC). +% \item It then starts a new structure rollmapped to L-structure +% and arranges for handling list items, e.g., Li, Lbl and LBody +% structures. +% \item At the end it closes open list structures as needed but +% keeps the \struct{text-unit}-structure open to continue the paragraph after the +% list, if necessary. +% \end{itemize} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \@@_recipe_list: +{ + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_hmode:w + \@@_beginpar_hmode:N + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_vmode: + \@@_beginpar_vmode: + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_begin: \@@_list_begin: + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_end: \@@_list_end: +% \end{macrocode} +% The next two lines could be done globally, because they are only +% called if we do have \cs{item}s, i.e., if we are in a list. It is +% therefore also not necessary to reset them in other recipes +% (right now---this may change if we get more templates (like +% inline lists)). +% \begin{macrocode} + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_list_item_begin: \@@_list_item_begin: + \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_list_item_end: \@@_list_item_end: +% \end{macrocode} +% Handle the tag name and attribute classess using the key values +% from the current list instance. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_empty:NTF \l_@@_tag_name_tl + { \tl_set:Nn \l__tag_L_tag_tl {L} } + { \tl_set_eq:NN \l__tag_L_tag_tl \l_@@_tag_name_tl } + \tl_if_empty:NTF \l_@@_tag_class_tl + { \tl_set:Nn \l__tag_L_attr_class_tl {} } + { \tl_set_eq:NN \l__tag_L_attr_class_tl \l_@@_tag_class_tl } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} + + + +% \subsection{Blockenv instances} +% +% +% \subsubsection{Basic instances} +% +% \begin{instance}{blockenv displayblock} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{displayblock}{display} +{ + env-name = displayblock, + tag-name = , + tag-class = , + tagging-recipe = standard, + inner-level-counter = , + level-increase = false, + setup-code = , + block-instance = displayblock , + inner-instance = , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% +% \begin{instance}{blockenv displayblockflattened} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{displayblockflattened}{display} +{ + env-name = displayblockflattened, + tag-name = , + tag-class = , + tagging-recipe = basic, + inner-level-counter = , + level-increase = false, + setup-code = , + block-instance = displayblock , + para-flattened = true , + inner-instance = , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% +% \begin{instance}{blockenv center} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{center}{display} +{ + env-name = center, + tag-name = , + tag-class = , + tagging-recipe = basic, + inner-level-counter = , + level-increase = false, + setup-code = , + block-instance = displayblock , + para-flattened = true , + para-instance = center , + inner-instance = , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% \begin{instance}{blockenv flushleft} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{flushleft}{display} +{ + env-name = flushleft, + tag-name = , + tag-class = , + tagging-recipe = basic, + inner-level-counter = , + level-increase = false, + setup-code = , + block-instance = displayblock , + para-flattened = true , + para-instance = raggedright , + inner-instance = , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% +% \begin{instance}{blockenv flushright} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{flushright}{display} +{ + env-name = flushleft, + tag-name = , + tag-class = , + tagging-recipe = basic, + inner-level-counter = , + level-increase = false, + setup-code = , + block-instance = displayblock , + para-flattened = true , + para-instance = raggedleft , + inner-instance = , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Blockquote instances} +% +% \begin{instance}{blockenv quotation} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\tag_if_active:T { + \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=quote,role=BlockQuote}} + \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=quotation,role=BlockQuote}} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{quotation}{display} +{ + env-name = quotation, + tag-name = quotation, + tag-class = , + tagging-recipe = standard, + inner-level-counter = , + level-increase = true, + setup-code = , + block-instance = quotationblock , + inner-instance = , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% +% \begin{instance}{blockenv quote} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{quote}{display} +{ + env-name = quote, + tag-name = quote, + tag-class = , + tagging-recipe = standard, + inner-level-counter = , + level-increase = true, + setup-code = , + block-instance = quoteblock , + inner-instance = , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% An alternative setup for quotations, using the displayblock instance and +% just overwrite a bit in the setup code.\fmi{I guess the setup +% code is still executed too early, have to check.} +% This would be less flexible but would ensure visual consistency, +% because the displayblock settings are used throughout. +% \begin{macrocode} +% \DeclareInstance{blockenv}{quotation}{display} +% { +% env-name = quotation, +% tag-name = , +% tag-class = , +% tagging-recipe = blockquote, +% inner-level-counter = , +% level-increase = true, +% setup-code = \setlength\rightmargin{\leftmargin} +% \setlength\parsep{1.5em} , +% block-instance = displayblock , +% inner-instance = , +% } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +% \DeclareInstance{blockenv}{quote}{display} +% { +% env-name = quote, +% tag-name = , +% tag-class = , +% tagging-recipe = blockquote, +% inner-level-counter = , +% level-increase = true, +% setup-code = \setlength\rightmargin{\leftmargin} , +% block-instance = displayblock , +% inner-instance = , +% } +% \end{macrocode} +% + +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{theorem}{display} +{ + env-name = theorem-like, + tag-name = theorem-like, + tag-class = , + tagging-recipe = standalone, + inner-level-counter = , + level-increase = false, + setup-code = , + block-instance = displayblock , +% inner-instance-type = innerblock , +% inner-instance = theorem, +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We use \struct{theorem-like} as the structure name and rollmap it +% to a \struct{Sect} because that can hold a \struct{Caption}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tag_if_active:T { + \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=theorem-like,role=Sect}} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Verbatim instances} +% +% \begin{instance}{blockenv verbatim} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\tag_if_active:T { + \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=verbatim,role=P}} + \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=codeline,role=Sub}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Possible alternative for PDF 1.7: +% \begin{macrocode} +% \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=verbatim,role=Div}} +% \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=codeline,role=P}} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{verbatim}{display} +{ + env-name = verbatim, + tag-name = verbatim, + tag-class = , + tagging-recipe = standard, + inner-level-counter = , + level-increase = false, + setup-code = , + block-instance = verbatimblock , + inner-instance = , + final-code = \legacyverbatimsetup , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% \subsubsection{Standard list instances} +% +% \begin{instance}{blockenv itemize} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{itemize}{display} +{ + env-name = itemize, + tag-name = itemize, + tag-class = itemize, + tagging-recipe = list, + inner-level-counter = \@itemdepth, + level-increase = true, + max-inner-levels = 4, + setup-code = , + block-instance = list , + inner-instance = itemize , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% \begin{instance}{blockenv enumerate} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{enumerate}{display} +{ + env-name = enumerate, + tag-name = enumerate, + tag-class = enumerate, + tagging-recipe = list, + level-increase = true, + setup-code = , + block-instance = list , + inner-level-counter = \@enumdepth, + max-inner-levels = 4, + inner-instance = enum , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% \begin{instance}{blockenv description} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + +\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{description}{display} +{ + env-name = description, + tag-name = description, + tag-class = description, + tagging-recipe = list, + inner-level-counter = , + level-increase = true, + setup-code = , + block-instance = list , + inner-instance = description , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% \begin{instance}{blockenv list} +% The general (legacy) \env{list} environment does some of its +% setup in the \texttt{setup-code} key. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{list}{display} +{ + env-name = list, + tag-name = list, + tag-class = , + tagging-recipe = list, + level-increase = true, + setup-code = \legacylistsetupcode , + block-instance = list , + inner-level-counter = , + inner-instance = legacy , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% +% +% \subsection{Block instances} +% +% \subsubsection{Displayblock instances} +% +% We provide 6 nesting levels (as in \LaTeXe{}). If you want to +% provide more you need to change the \texttt{maxblocklevels} +% counter, offer further \texttt{displayblock-xx} instances but +% also define further (legacy) \cs{list\meta{romannumeral}} commands +% for the defaults. If not, then the settings from the previous +% level are reused automatically---which may or may not be good enough). +% \begin{macrocode} +\setcounter{maxblocklevels}{6} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{instance}{block displayblock-0, +% block displayblock-1, +% block displayblock-2, +% block displayblock-3, +% block displayblock-4, +% block displayblock-5, +% block displayblock-6 } +% +% Here we need level zero as well in case a flattened displayblock +% (like the center env) it is used on top-level. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{block}{displayblock-0}{display} + { + leftmargin = 0pt , + parindent = 0pt , + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{displayblock-1}{displayblock-0} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{displayblock-2}{displayblock-0} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{displayblock-3}{displayblock-0} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{displayblock-4}{displayblock-0} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{displayblock-5}{displayblock-0} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{displayblock-6}{displayblock-0} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Verbatim instances} +% +% Verbatim instances have there own levels so that one can specify +% specific indentations or vertical separations between line. +% +% \begin{instance}{block verbatimblock-0, +% block verbatimblock-1, +% block verbatimblock-2, +% block verbatimblock-3, +% block verbatimblock-4, +% block verbatimblock-5, +% block verbatimblock-6 } +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{block}{verbatimblock-0}{display} + { + leftmargin = 0pt , + parindent = 0pt , + par-skip = 0pt , + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{verbatimblock-1}{verbatimblock-0} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{verbatimblock-2}{verbatimblock-0} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{verbatimblock-3}{verbatimblock-0} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{verbatimblock-4}{verbatimblock-0} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{verbatimblock-5}{verbatimblock-0} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{verbatimblock-6}{verbatimblock-0} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Quote/quotationblock instances} +% +% Quote and quotation are not flattened, i.e., they change levels, +% thus they start with level 1 not 0. +% +% \begin{instance}{block quoteblock-1, +% block quoteblock-2, +% block quoteblock-3, +% block quoteblock-4, +% block quoteblock-5, +% block quoteblock-6 } +% Default layout is to indent equaly from both side. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{block}{quoteblock-1}{display} + { rightmargin = \KeyValue{leftmargin} } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quoteblock-2}{quoteblock-1} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quoteblock-3}{quoteblock-1} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quoteblock-4}{quoteblock-1} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quoteblock-5}{quoteblock-1} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quoteblock-6}{quoteblock-1} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% +% \begin{instance}{block quotationblock-1, +% block quotationblock-2, +% block quotationblock-3, +% block quotationblock-4, +% block quotationblock-5, +% block quotationblock-6 } +% Quotation additionally changes the parindent. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{block}{quotationblock-1}{display} + { parindent = 1.5em , rightmargin = \KeyValue{leftmargin} } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quotationblock-2}{quotationblock-1} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quotationblock-3}{quotationblock-1} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quotationblock-4}{quotationblock-1} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quotationblock-5}{quotationblock-1} +\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quotationblock-6}{quotationblock-1} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% \subsubsection{Block instances for the standard lists} +% +% \begin{instance}{block list-1, +% block list-2, +% block list-3, +% block list-4, +% block list-5, +% block list-6 } +% The block instances for the various list environments use the +% same underlying instance (well by default) and nothing nothing +% needs to be set up specifically (because that is already done in +% the legacy \cs{list\meta{romannumeral}} unless a +% different layout is wanted. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{block}{list-1}{display}{ +% heading = , +% beginsep = \topsep , +% begin-par-skip = \partopsep , +% par-skip = \parsep , +% end-skip = \KeyValue{beginsep} , +% end-par-skip = \KeyValue{begin-par-skip} , +% beginpenalty = \UseName{@beginparpenalty} , +% endpenalty = \UseName{@endparpenalty} , +% leftmargin = \leftmargin , +% rightmargin = \rightmargin , +% parindent = \listparindent , +} +\DeclareInstance{block}{list-2}{display}{} +\DeclareInstance{block}{list-3}{display}{} +\DeclareInstance{block}{list-4}{display}{} +\DeclareInstance{block}{list-5}{display}{} +\DeclareInstance{block}{list-6}{display}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% +% \subsection{List instances for the standard lists} +% +% For all list instances we have to say what kind of label we want +% (\texttt{label-instance}) and how it should beformatted. +% +% \begin{instance}{list itemize-1, +% list itemize-2, +% list itemize-3, +% list itemize-4} +% For \env{itemize} environments this is all we need to do and we +% refer back to the external definitions rather than defining the +% \texttt{item-label} code in the instance to ensure that old +% documents still work. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{list}{itemize-1}{std}{ item-label = \labelitemi } +\DeclareInstance{list}{itemize-2}{std}{ item-label = \labelitemii } +\DeclareInstance{list}{itemize-3}{std}{ item-label = \labelitemiii } +\DeclareInstance{list}{itemize-4}{std}{ item-label = \labelitemiv } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% +% \begin{instance}{list enumerate-1, +% list enumerate-2, +% list enumerate-3, +% list enumerate-4} +% \env{enumerate} environments are similar, except that we also +% have to say which counter to use on every level. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{list}{enum-1}{std} + { item-label = \labelenumi , counter = enumi } +\DeclareInstance{list}{enum-2}{std} + { item-label = \labelenumii , counter = enumii } +\DeclareInstance{list}{enum-3}{std} + { item-label = \labelenumiii , counter = enumiii } +\DeclareInstance{list}{enum-4}{std} + { item-label = \labelenumiv , counter = enumiv } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% +% \begin{instance}{list legacy} +% For the legacy \env{list} environment there is only one instance +% which is reused on all levels. This is done this way one because +% the legacy \env{list} environment sets all its +% parameters through its arguments. So this instances shouldn't +% really be touched. It sets the \texttt{legacy-support} key to +% true, which means that the list code uses \cs{makelabel} for +% formatting the label +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{list}{legacy}{std} { + item-instance = basic , + legacy-support = true , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% \begin{instance}{list description} +% The \env{description} lists also use only a single list instance +% with only one key not using the default: +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{list}{description}{std} { item-instance = description } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% \subsection{Item instances} +% +% +% \begin{instance}{item basic, item description} +% There two item instances set up: \texttt{description} for use +% with the \env{description} environment and \texttt{basic} for use +% with all other lists (up to now). +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{item}{basic}{std} + { + label-align = right , + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{item}{description}{std} + { + label-format = \normalfont\bfseries #1 , + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Para instances} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\tag_if_active:T +{ + \tagpdfsetup + { + newattribute = {justify} {/O /Layout /TextAlign/Justify}, + newattribute = {center} {/O /Layout /TextAlign/Center}, + newattribute = {raggedright}{/O /Layout /TextAlign/Start}, + newattribute = {raggedleft} {/O /Layout /TextAlign/End}, + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{instance}{para center} +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{para}{center}{std} +{ + indent-width = 0pt , + start-skip = 0pt , + left-skip = \@flushglue , + right-skip = \@flushglue , + end-skip = \z@skip , + final-hyphen-demerits = 0 , + cr-cmd = \@centercr , + para-class = center , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{para}{raggedright}{std} +{ + indent-width = 0pt , + start-skip = 0pt , + left-skip = \z@skip , + right-skip = \@flushglue , + end-skip = \z@skip , + final-hyphen-demerits = 0 , + cr-cmd = \@centercr , + para-class = raggedright , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{para}{raggedleft}{std} +{ + indent-width = 0pt , + start-skip = 0pt , + left-skip = \@flushglue , + right-skip = \z@skip , + end-skip = \z@skip , + final-hyphen-demerits = 0 , + cr-cmd = \@centercr , + para-class = raggedleft , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareInstance{para}{justify}{std} +{ +% indent-width = 0pt , + start-skip = 0pt , + left-skip = \z@skip , + right-skip = \z@skip , + end-skip = \@flushglue , + final-hyphen-demerits = 5000 , + cr-cmd = \@normalcr , + para-class = justify , +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{instance} +% +% +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand\centering {\UseInstance{para}{center}{}} +\DeclareRobustCommand\raggedleft {\UseInstance{para}{raggedleft}{}} +\DeclareRobustCommand\raggedright{\UseInstance{para}{raggedright}{}} +\DeclareRobustCommand\justifying {\UseInstance{para}{justify}{}} + +\justifying +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% +% +% \subsection{Tagging support} +% +% In this section we provide code to the various kernel hooks to support +% the tagging of the different displayblock environments. +% +% +% +% All of the following definitions should only be made if tagging +% is active! +% \begin{macrocode} +\tag_if_active:T { +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_beginpar_vmode:} +% When a block starts out in vertical mode, i.e., is not yet part of +% a paragraph, we have to start a paragraph +% structure. However, this is not the case if we are already +% flattening paragraphs, thus in this case we do nothing. +% We also do nothing if \texttt{@endpe} is currently true, because +% that means we are right now just after the end of a +% \texttt{blockenv} and in the process of looking if we have to end +% the current \texttt{text-unit}, i.e., it is already open. +% \begin{macrocode} + \cs_set:Npn \@@_beginpar_vmode: { + \@@_debug_typeout:n + { @endpe = \legacy_if:nTF { @endpe }{true}{false} + \on@line } + \legacy_if:nTF { @endpe } + { + \legacy_if_gset_false:n { @endpe } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% We test for \texttt{<2} because the first flattened environment +% has to surround itself with a \texttt{text-unit}. Only any inner ones +% then have to avoid adding another \texttt{text-unit}. +% \begin{macrocode} + { + \int_compare:nNnT \l_@@_flattened_level_int < 2 + { + \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_begin_int + \tagstructbegin{tag=\l__tag_para_main_tag_tl} + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_beginpar_hmode:N} +% If the block is already part of a part of a paragraph, i.e., when it has +% some text directly in front, then the first thing to +% do is to return to vertical mode. However, that should be done +% without inserting a paragraph end tag, so before calling \cs{par} +% to do its normal work, we disable paragraph tagging and +% restarting afterwards again. The argument to this config point +% simply gobbles the \cs{par} following it in the code above (which +% is used when there is no tagging going on. +% \begin{macrocode} + \cs_set:Npn \@@_beginpar_hmode:N #1 + { + \tag_mc_end: + \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_end_int + \@@_debug_typeout:n{increment~ /P \on@line } + \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_show_bool + { \tag_mc_begin:n{artifact} + \rlap{\color_select:n{red}\tiny\ \int_use:N\g__tag_para_end_int} + \tag_mc_end: + } + \tag_struct_end: + \tagpdfparaOff \par \tagpdfparaOn + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_displayblock_doendpe:} +% If a display block ends and is followed by a blank line we have to end the +% enclosing paragraph tagging structure. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set:Npn \__kernel_displayblock_doendpe: { + \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_bool + { +% \end{macrocode} +% Given that restoring \cs{par} through the legacy \LaTeXe{} method +% can take a few iterations (for example, in case of nested lists, +% e.g., \verb=...\end{itemize} \item ...\par= it can happen that +% \cs{__kernel_displayblock_doendpe:} is called while +% \texttt{@endpe} is already handled and then we should not attempt +% to close a \texttt{text-unit} structure. So we need to check for this. +% \begin{macrocode} + \legacy_if:nT { @endpe } + { +% \end{macrocode} +% If the display block currently ending was \enquote{flattened} +% (i.e., uses simplified paragraphs that are not tagged by a +% combination of \texttt{text-unit} followed by \struct{text}, but simply +% with a \struct{text}, +% then we don't have to do anything, because the \struct{text} is already closed. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_debug_typeout:n + { flattened= \bool_if:NTF + \l__tag_para_flattened_bool {true}{false} + \on@line } + \bool_if:NF \l__tag_para_flattened_bool + { + \@@_debug_typeout:n{Structure-end~ + \l__tag_para_main_tag_tl\space after~ displayblock \on@line } + \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_end_int + \tag_struct_end: %text-unit + } + } + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{para/begin} +% +% Paragraph tagging is mainly done using the paragraph hooks (will +% get moved eventually). The default hook setting is not good +% enough when lists get suppported: we need to delay starting the +% paragraph tagging if we still have to place the list label. +% We therefore remove the existing hook data and replace it with an +% augmented version (this will get combined eventually). +% \begin{macrocode} +\RemoveFromHook{para/begin}[tagpdf] +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{para/begin}[tagpdf]{ + \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_bool { +% \end{macrocode} +% if we are still waiting to typeset the list label we do nothing +% (the paragraph tagging then happens when the list is finally +% typeset). +% \begin{macrocode} + \legacy_if:nF { @inlabel } + { +% \end{macrocode} +% Otherwise, we start a \struct{text} tag structure but only if we are not +% starting a paragraph immediately \emph{after} a list, in which +% case we only start a new MC (because the \struct{text} tag is still open from +% before the list --- one of the reasons why lists are always put +% \enquote{inside} paragraphs. +% +% We do this in a separate command, because it is needed elsewhere too. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_start_para_structure:n { \PARALABEL } + } + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_start_para_structure:n} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_start_para_structure:n #1 { + \@@_debug_typeout:n + { @endpe = \legacy_if:nTF { @endpe }{true}{false} + \on@line } + \legacy_if:nF { @endpe } + { + \bool_if:NF \l__tag_para_flattened_bool + { + \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_begin_int + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=\l__tag_para_main_tag_tl} + } + } + \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_begin_int + \@@_debug_typeout:n{increment~ P \on@line } + \tag_struct_begin:n + { + tag=\l__tag_para_tag_tl + ,attribute-class=\l_tag_para_attr_class_tl + } + \__tag_check_para_begin_show:nn {green}{#1} + \tag_mc_begin:n {} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% The same code, but without testing \texttt{@endpe}. This is not +% needed in the standalong e case and wrong inside lists. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_start_para_structure_unconditionally:n #1 { + \bool_if:NF \l__tag_para_flattened_bool + { + \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_begin_int + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=\l__tag_para_main_tag_tl} + } + \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_begin_int + \@@_debug_typeout:n{increment~ P \on@line } + \tag_struct_begin:n + { + tag=\l__tag_para_tag_tl + ,attribute-class=\l_tag_para_attr_class_tl + } + \__tag_check_para_begin_show:nn {green}{#1} + \tag_mc_begin:n {} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\tag_if_active:T { +% \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=text-unit,role=Part}} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\RemoveFromHook{para/end}[tagpdf] +\AddToHook{para/end} + { + \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_bool + { + \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_end_int + \@@_debug_typeout:n{increment~ /P \on@line } + \tag_mc_end: + \__tag_check_para_end_show:nn {red}{} + \tag_struct_end: + \bool_if:NF \l__tag_para_flattened_bool + { + \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_end_int + \tag_struct_end: + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PARALABEL{NP-} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\para_end:} +% If we see a \cs{par} in vmode and a \texttt{text-unit} is still open +% we need to close that. For this we check if a request for +% \text{@endpe} was made (but the \cs{par} redefinition got lost +% due to (bad?) coding). +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set_protected:Npn \para_end: { + \scan_stop: + \mode_if_horizontal:TF { + \mode_if_inner:F { + \tex_unskip:D + \hook_use:n{para/end} + \@kernel@after@para@end + \mode_if_horizontal:TF { + \if_int_compare:w 11 = \tex_lastnodetype:D + \tex_hskip:D \c_zero_dim + \fi: + \tex_par:D + \hook_use:n{para/after} + \@kernel@after@para@after + } + { \msg_error:nnnn { hooks }{ para-mode }{end}{horizontal} } + } + } + { + \__kernel_endpe_vmode: % should do nothing if no tagging + \tex_par:D + } +} +\cs_set_eq:NN \par \para_end: +\cs_set_eq:NN \@@par \para_end: +\cs_set_eq:NN \endgraf \para_end: +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\begin} +% We need to do a little more than canceling \texttt{@endpe} now. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand*\begin[1]{% + \UseHook{env/#1/before}% + \@ifundefined{#1}% + {\def\reserved@a{\@latex@error{Environment #1 undefined}\@eha}}% + {\def\reserved@a{\def\@currenvir{#1}% + \edef\@currenvline{\on@line}% + \@execute@begin@hook{#1}% + \csname #1\endcsname}}% + \@ignorefalse + \begingroup + \__kernel_endpe_vmode: + \reserved@a} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_endpe_vmode:} +% Close an open \texttt{text-unit} if \texttt{@endpe} is true and we +% are in vmode. Used in \cs{para_end:} and \cs{begin}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \__kernel_endpe_vmode: { + \if@endpe \ifvmode + \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_bool + { + \bool_if:NF \l__tag_para_flattened_bool + { + \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_end_int + \tag_struct_end: + } + \@endpefalse + } + \fi \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_list_label_after:} +% If starting the text-unit/text tags got delayed because of a pending label we +% have to do it after the label got typeset +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set:Npn \__kernel_list_label_after: { + \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_bool + { + \@@_start_para_structure_unconditionally:n { LI- } + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_inner_begin:} +% Start a block that has an inner structure if it isn't also a list. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \@@_inner_begin: { + \tagstructbegin{tag=\l_@@_tag_inner_tag_tl} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_inner_end:} +% End a block (which isn't also a list). +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \@@_inner_end: { + \@@_debug_typeout:n{block-end \on@line} + \legacy_if:nT { @endpe } + { + \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_end_int + \@@_debug_typeout:n{close~ /text-unit \on@line} + \tagstructend + } + \tagstructend % end inner structure +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{List tags} +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l__tag_L_tag_tl +\tl_set:Nn \l__tag_L_tag_tl {L} + +\tl_new:N\l__tag_L_attr_class_tl +\tl_set:Nn \l__tag_L_attr_class_tl {list} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\tag_if_active:T +{ + \tagpdfsetup + { + % default if unknown + newattribute = {list}{/O /List /ListNumbering/None}, + newattribute = {itemize}{/O /List /ListNumbering/Unordered}, + newattribute = {enumerate}{/O /List /ListNumbering/Ordered}, + newattribute = {description}{/O /List /ListNumbering/Description}, + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\LItag{LI} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_list_begin:} +% Start a list \ldots +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set:Npn \@@_list_begin: { + \tagstructbegin + { + tag=\l__tag_L_tag_tl + ,attribute-class=\l__tag_L_attr_class_tl + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_list_item_begin:} +% Start tagging a list item. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set:Npn \@@_list_item_begin: { \tagstructbegin{tag=\LItag} } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_list_label_begin:} +% A list label needs a \texttt{Lbl} structure tag and an MC. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set:Npn \__kernel_list_label_begin: { +% +% FMi: this needs a different logic to decide when to make the label +% an artifact (after cleaning up the the \item code ), therefore +% disabled for now +% \tl_if_empty:oTF \@itemlabel +% { +% \tag_mc_begin:n {artifact} +% } +% { + \tagstructbegin{tag=Lbl} + \tagmcbegin{tag=Lbl} +% } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_list_label_end:} +% And when we are done with the label we have to close the MC and +% the \texttt{Lbl} structure. We then start the \texttt{LBody}. The +% material inside will be \enquote{paragraph} text and the tagging +% for that is handled by the normal para tagging. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set:Npn \__kernel_list_label_end: { + \tagmcend % end mc-Lbl or artifact +% FMi: unconditionally for now +% \tl_if_empty:oF \@itemlabel + \tagstructend % end Lbl + \tagstructbegin{tag=\LBody} +} +\def\LBody{LBody} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_list_item_end:} +% When a list item ends we have to close \texttt{LBody} and +% \texttt{LI} but also a \struct{text} in the special case that the +% item material ends in a list (identifiable via \texttt{@endpe}). +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set:Npn \@@_list_item_end: { + \legacy_if:nT { @endpe } + { + \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_end_int + \tagstructend % text-unit +% \@@_debug_typeout:n{Structure-end~ P~ at~ item-end \on@line } + } + \tagstructend \tagstructend % end LBody, LI +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_list_end:} +% Finally, at the list end we have to close the open +% \texttt{LBody}, \texttt{LI}, \texttt{L}, and possibly a +% \struct{text} if the last item ends with a list. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set:Npn \@@_list_end: { + \legacy_if:nT { @endpe } + { + \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_end_int + \tagstructend % text-unit + \@@_debug_typeout:n{Structure-end~ P~ at~ list-end \on@line } + } + \tagstructend\tagstructend % end LBody, LI + \tagstructend % end L +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% +% +% End of tagging related declarations. +% \begin{macrocode} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% +% +% +% +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%</package> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latex-lab> +\ProvidesFile{block-tagging-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [\ltblocksdate\space \ltblocksversion\space + blockenv implementation] +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-block-tagging} +%</latex-lab> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{implementation} +% +% +% \section{Documentation from first prototype implementations} +% +% +% \subsection{Open questions} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Existing questions --- moved to issues --- +% \end{itemize} +% +% \subsection{Code cleanup} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Actually implement what's announced. +% +% \item Encapsulate most uses of \cs[no-index]{legacy_if\dots} into +% commands with \texttt{expl3} syntax: we cannot rename these booleans +% for compatibility reasons but we can make the code cleaner +% nevertheless. --- made issue --- +% +% \item The \tn{topsep} and \tn{partopsep} business is tricky to +% reproduce exactly (see \tn{@topsepadd} and \tn{@topsep}) because of +% how it accumulates when lists are nested immediately. +% +% \end{itemize} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Tasks} +% \begin{itemize} +% +% \item Change author to LaTeX Team once it's nice enough to deserve +% that label. +% +% \item Reproducing exactly the standard layouts and examples in the +% \pkg{enumitem} documentation. +% +% \item Hooks, but do not duplicate those that already exist as +% environment hooks. Hence, mostly around items. +% +% \item Customization and interaction with LDB: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Allow arbitrary nesting depth with automatically defined +% styles for labels, counters etc. +% \item Adapt everything to font size! (e.g. footnotes). +% \item How to model the inheritance from trivlist to list to +% enumerate? +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item Add key--value settings mimicking \pkg{enumitem}'s ability to +% set any four of five horizontal parameters and deduce the fifth by +% $\cs{leftmargin} + \cs{itemindent} = \cs{labelindent} + +% \cs{labelwidth} + \cs{labelsep}$. +% +% \item Provide good ways to customize how overlong labels are dealt with. +% +% \item Use the \texttt{.aux} file. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Implement the \tn{ref} styles that \pkg{enumitem} provides. +% \item Reverse enumerations, important in publication lists and the +% like. Somehow avoid needing 3 compilations for references to +% reverse enumerations to settle? +% \item Ability to calculate \tn{labelwidth} from the label contents. +% Share calculated parameters between multiple environments (cf.\ +% \texttt{resume} option). +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item Related to grabbing the whole list environment, and input syntax +% variations: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Other layouts: tabular (see \pkg{listliketab} vs +% \pkg{typed-checklist}), multicolumn and horizontally numbered (see +% \pkg{tasks}), inline lists, runin lists in the easy case where +% there is no intervening \tn{par}. +% \item Formatting the item text in a +% box or similar (requires grabbing the whole list). +% \item Filtering which items to show: hide certain items according to +% criteria (useful together with list reuse), see +% \pkg{typed-checklist}. +% \item Shorthands \tn{iitem} for automatic nested lists, or \cs{1}, +% \cs{2} etc from \pkg{outlines}. +% \item Support markdown input like \pkg{asciilist}. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item Check interaction with \texttt{babel} options such as +% \texttt{french} or \texttt{accadian} (see FrenchItemizeSpacing) +% +% \item RTL and vertical typesetting. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \section{Plan of attack of first prototype} +% +% Typesetting list environments involves a rather large number of +% parameters. They can be affected by the context such as the total +% list nesting level, the nesting level of the given type of list, and +% the font size. An environment like \texttt{enumerate} has two main +% aspects. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item It has a certain layout in the page, with vertical and +% horizontal spacing around it. This type of layout is shared with +% environments such as \texttt{quote}, \texttt{flushright}, or +% \texttt{tabbing}. This common layout is implemented in \LaTeXe{} +% through \cs{trivlist} (or \cs{list}). +% \item It defines how each \cs{item} should be typeset: how to +% construct the label, in particular the \texttt{counter} name, and +% how to format the content of the item. +% \end{itemize} +% +% This suggests defining two object types, \xt{block} and \xt{item} +% covering these two aspects.\footnote{Possibly also \xt{endblock} to +% deal with decorations at the end?} While the \xt{item} type will +% perhaps have a single template, one could typeset a \xt{block} object +% in several ways, for instance the standard \LaTeXe{} way or a fancy +% colored box. +% +% The \xt{general} \xt{block} template should receive the following +% parameters. The \xt{plain} \xt{block} template is a restricted +% template that freezes all item-related parameters to dummy values +% (\texttt{counter}, \texttt{start}, \texttt{resume}, +% \texttt{label-width}, \texttt{label-sep} and all \texttt{item-*}). +% The \xt{list} \xt{block} template is a restricted template\footnote{A +% better approach could be to have a notion of inheritance for object +% types, so that we end up with two different \emph{object types}. Then +% we can implement other template for the list object type: \xt{table} +% for lists typeset as rows/columns of a table, \xt{inline} for lists +% typeset in horizontal mode within a paragraph, and \xt{runin} for +% run-in lists.} that omits the \texttt{heading} parameter and whose +% default for \texttt{item-instance} is non-empty. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Structural parameters: the \texttt{heading} to place before, +% \texttt{counter} name, \texttt{start} value, whether to +% \texttt{resume} a previous list, and the \texttt{item-instance} (an +% \xt{item} instance) to use when typesetting items. +% \item Vertical spacing and penalties: \texttt{beginpenalty}, +% \texttt{beginsep}, \texttt{begin-par-skip}, \texttt{item-penalty}, +% \texttt{item-skip}, \texttt{item-par-skip}, \texttt{endpenalty}, +% \texttt{end-skip}, \texttt{end-par-skip}. +% \item Horizontal spacing: \texttt{rightmargin}, \texttt{leftmargin}, +% \texttt{parindent}, \texttt{item-indent}, \texttt{label-width}, +% \texttt{label-sep}. +% \end{itemize} +% A \docclass should edit these templates (or define restricted +% templates) to set up default values that depend on \tn{g_block_nesting_depth_int}, +% namely how many lists are nested overall.\footnote{Does +% \pkg{xtemplate} provide a way to specify default values that are only +% evaluated once an instance is used?} The document class should then +% set up an instance of these templates for each environment, with +% appropriate settings such as a \texttt{heading}, a suitable +% \texttt{item-instance}, or making \texttt{margin-right} equal to +% \texttt{margin-left} in a \texttt{quote} environment. +% +% The \xt{inline-list} \xt{block} template receives many fewer +% parameters. Note that \texttt{beginsep}, \texttt{item-skip}, +% \texttt{end-skip} are now \emph{horizontal} skips. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Structural parameters: \texttt{counter}, \texttt{start}, +% \texttt{resume}, \texttt{item-instance}. +% \item Spacing and penalties: \texttt{beginpenalty}, +% \texttt{beginsep}, \texttt{item-penalty}, \texttt{item-skip}, +% \texttt{endpenalty}, \texttt{end-skip}. +% \item Horizontal spacing: \texttt{label-width}, \texttt{label-sep}. +% \end{itemize} +% +% The \xt{std} \xt{item} template should receive the following +% parameters. They depend on the type of list and its nesting level +% among lists of such type, but typically not on the total nesting +% level. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Counter name (\texttt{counter}), shared with the parent +% \xt{list} \xt{block} template, but needed for incrementing. +% \item Label construction: a function \texttt{counter-label} that +% produces the label from the counter name, used if \tn{item} is given +% without argument. +% \item References: a function \texttt{counter-ref} for how the label +% should be referred to when it is constructed from the counter, +% \texttt{label-ref} and \texttt{label-autoref} used when \tn{item} +% has an optional argument. +% \item Label formatting: \texttt{label-format} function, +% \texttt{label-strut} boolean. +% \item Label alignment (\texttt{label-align}, \texttt{label-boxed}, +% \texttt{next-line}). +% \item Content parameters: \texttt{text-font}. +% \item A \texttt{compatibility} boolean that controls for instance +% whether \tn{makelabel} is used. +% \end{itemize} +% The \docclass should set up an instance such as \xt{enumiii} for each +% environment and nesting level.\footnote{This should be made easily +% extendible to deeper levels.} +% +% A given environment will adjust some nesting levels, then call the +% \xt{block} instance appropriate to the environment type, passing it +% the \xt{item} instance appropriate to the environment and depth. +% Additional context-dependence could be provided by \pkg{l3ldb}, but +% the main context-dependence should not rely on it for simplicity +% reasons and incidentally because \pkg{l3ldb} is not yet available. +% +% +% \Finale +% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-firstaid.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-firstaid.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8f474e6b121 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-firstaid.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-firstaid.dtx (C) Copyright 2023 LaTeX Project +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% +% The development version of the bundle can be found below +% +% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab +% +% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue. +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-firstaid.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% +% \title{The \textsf{latex-lab-firstaid} package\\ +% Temporary patches to external packages} +% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial implementation done by Ulrike Fischer}} +% \date{Version 0.80 2023-06-04} +% +% \maketitle +% +% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}} +% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}} +% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class +% customizations}} +% +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% +% \begin{abstract} +% \end{abstract} +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% The followings contains small temporary changes to external packages to avoid +% errors with the new tagging code. +% +% Similar to the main firstaid package the goal is to remove the +% patches once the packages have been updated. + +% \section{Implementation} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*package> +%<@@=tag> +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesPackage {latex-lab-testphase-firstaid} [2023-06-04 v0.8 + Temporary patches to external packages need for the tagging project] +% \end{macrocode} + +% \subsection{blindtext} +% The blindtext package generates lists with nested \cs{loop} command. +% The inner loop introduces a group around the list which error when lists are tagged +% as \cs{@doendpe} is lost. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{file/blindtext.sty/after}[latex-lab-firstaid]{% + \FirstAidNeededT{blindtext}{sty}{\blindfiledate\space\blindfileversion\space% + blindtext-Package}% + {% + \renewcommand{\blind@items}{% + \setcounter{blind@listcount}{1}% + \loop + \ifblind@optional + \ifblind@long + \item[\blindtext@countitem] \blindtext@text + \else + \item[\blindtext@count] \blindtext@item + \fi + \else % \blind@optionalfalse + \ifblind@long + \item \blindtext@text + \else + \item \blindtext@countitem + \fi + \fi % \ifblind@optional + {% + \loop + \ifnum\value{blindlistlevel}>\value{blindlist@level}% + \stepcounter{blind@levelcount}% + \blind@list[\value{blindlist}]\relax + \addtocounter{blind@levelcount}{-1}% + \setcounter{blind@listcount}{1}% + \repeat + \expandafter}\if@endpe\@doendpe\fi % <----------changed + \ifnum\value{blind@listcount}<\value{blindlist}% + \stepcounter{blind@listcount}% + \repeat + } + }% + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsection{ltugboat} +% ltugboat need only a redefinition of \cs{l@section} to add the hooks +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{file/ltugboat.cls/after} + { + \def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}% + \addvspace{\TBtocsectionspace}% + \@tempdima 1.5em + \begingroup + \parindent\z@ \rightskip\z@ % article style makes \rightskip > 0 + \parfillskip\z@ + \TBtocsectionfont + \leavevmode\advance\leftskip\@tempdima\hskip-\leftskip + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/before}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \csname contentsline@text@1@format\endcsname{#1}% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/after}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \nobreak\hfil + \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/before}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + #2% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/after}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + }\par + \endgroup} + } +% \end{macrocode} + +% \begin{macrocode} +%</package> +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latex-lab> +\ProvidesFile{firstaid-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [2023-06-04 v0.8 Temporary patches to external packages need for the tagging project] + +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-firstaid} + +%</latex-lab> +% \end{macrocode} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-float.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-float.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..430b2aec96c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-float.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,494 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-float.dtx (C) Copyright 2023 LaTeX Project +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% +% The development version of the bundle can be found below +% +% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab +% +% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue. +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-float.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% +% +% \title{The \textsf{latex-lab-floats} package\\ +% Tagging of floats } +% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial implementation done by Ulrike Fischer}} +% \date{v0.81 2023-06-07} +% +% \maketitle +% +% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}} +% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}} +% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class +% customizations}} +% +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% \begin{documentation} +% \begin{abstract} +% The following code implements a first draft for the tagging of float +% environments +% \end{abstract} +% +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% The code here handle the tagging of float environments. +% +% Figures (and tables) are in \LaTeX{} typically typeset in float environments. +% These are boxes which can \emph{float} away to special float areas on the pages, +% e.g., to the top or the bottom of a page or to special float pages. +% If the rules allow it they can also be placed in the main text stream (\enquote{here}). +% Floats can also be collected at the end of the document. +% In either case the order within each type of floats +% (e.g., figures, tables, algorithms, etc.) is preserved. +% +% A special type, called a H-float, (provided by the float package) +% is always placed in the main text stream and does not +% necessarly preserve the order with normal floats of the same type: It is basically +% a minipage with a caption. +% +% Floats typically contain a figure (or a table, etc.) and a caption, +% but more complex constructions with subfigures, +% copyright statements, sources or additional description are possible too. +% +% In the \LaTeX{} source a float is normally more or less at the place of +% the first call-out, but when preparing a document for print the code +% is sometimes moved to place floats in a more visually pleasing way. +% +% \section{Tagging} +% +% Floats (with the exception of H-floats) do not belong into the text stream, they +% are \enquote{consultation objects}: Readers must be able to choose if and when they read the float. +% Floats have captions, the PDF rules require that a \texttt{Caption} is the first or last +% structure in its parent structure. +% This poses some challenges on a good tagging. +% +% In PDF~2.0 there is the suitable \texttt{Aside} tag which hopefully will +% be handled correctly regarding the reading order once processor actually support +% PDF~2.0. But in PDF~1.7 we rolemap it to \texttt{Note} and this doesn't lead to +% a good reading order. The code therefore collect the float structures and moves +% them to a \texttt{Sect} the end of the document or the chapter +% (H-floats once they are handled will not be moved). +% +% To fulfill the requirement that a \texttt{Caption} should be at the begin or end, we always +% move it to the begin of the structure. If a float has two captions the author +% has to insert a command which splits the float in two. +% +% Subfigures and subcaptions are currently not handled, but will be implemented +% as simple \texttt{Part} with their own \texttt{Caption}. +% +% \section{Links} +% The code disable the caption patches from hyperref. It will add an anchor at the +% begin of the float or a split. It changes caption so that a link to a caption label +% will go to the begin of the float. +% +% \section{Tools} +% +% The code add two keys for the \cs{tagtool} command +% +% \begin{description} +% \item[flush-floats] This will flush out the collected floats sofar (currently +% table and figure. The value is a sectioning level, e.g. \texttt{section} or \texttt{chapter}, +% the floats will then inserted as a \texttt{Sect} of this level (all \texttt{Sect} of smaller or equal +% level are closed). The key then starts a new container for following floats. +% If no value is given, the \texttt{Sect} is at the document level. The code automatically +% flush all open floats at the end of the document. +% +% \item[split-float] This can be used inside a float if there are two captions. +% It will only work reasonably well if the content of the float parts are in a sensible order +% and can be separated by this command. More complex setups with tabulars will need more +% thoughts +% +% \end{description} +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<@@=tag> +%<*package> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{documentation} +% \begin{implementation} +% \section{Implementation} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesExplPackage {latex-lab-testphase-float} {2023-04-28} {0.8} + {Code related to the tagging of floats} +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsection{Variables} +% We rolemap to Aside, and float sections to Sect +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag=float/Aside} +\tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag=figures/Sect} +\tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag=tables/Sect} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{variable}{ +% \g_@@_float_sect_prop, +% \g_@@_float_types_seq, +% \@current@float@struct +% } +% These variables will hold the structure number for the float container +% and the list of float types. Currently only figure and table are supported +% TODO: interface to declare new float types. +% \begin{macrocode} +\prop_new:N \g_@@_float_sect_prop +\seq_new:N \g_@@_float_types_seq +\seq_gput_right:Nn \g_@@_float_types_seq {figure} +\seq_gput_right:Nn \g_@@_float_types_seq {table} +\tl_new:N\@current@float@struct +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{variable}{\g_@@_float_sect_bool} +% With this boolean float collection is switched on and off. +% Currently it is always on and set globally. +% TODO: think if an interface is needed. +% TODO: would a local variable make more sense? +% \begin{macrocode} +\bool_new:N \g_@@_float_sect_bool +\bool_gset_true:N \g_@@_float_sect_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% +%\subsection{Moving float structures} +% +% Currently it is for all float types or none. +% Probably we will need some more options here to select some float types. +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_float_init_collect:} +% This initializes a container structure for every float type. +% It can be used more than once in a document, this allows to have e.g. +% chapter wise containers. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn\@@_float_init_collect: + { + \bool_if:NT\g_@@_float_sect_bool + { + \seq_map_inline:Nn\g_@@_float_types_seq + { + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=##1s,stash} + \prop_gput:Nnx\g_@@_float_sect_prop {##1-struct}{\int_use:N\c@g__tag_struct_abs_int} + \tag_struct_end: + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_float_stop_sect:} +% This pushes out the floats. For every type is checks if there is actually +% a float of this type and then writes out the container structure. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_float_stop_sect: + { + \bool_if:NT\g_@@_float_sect_bool + { + \seq_map_inline:Nn\g_@@_float_types_seq + { + \prop_get:NnNT\g_@@_float_sect_prop{##1-used}\l_@@_tmpa_tl + { + \exp_args:Ne + \tag_struct_use_num:n{\prop_item:Nn\g_@@_float_sect_prop{##1-struct}} + \prop_gremove:Nn \g_@@_float_sect_prop{##1-used} + } + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} + +% \begin{macro}{flush-floats} +% This is a key for \cs{tagtool} to flush out the collected floats. +% The value allows to set to which level the create Sect contains. +% So \texttt{section} will close all previous Sect until the section level +% and create a new section. +% \begin{macrocode} +\keys_define:nn { tag / tool} + { + flush-floats .code:n = + { + \keys_set:nn {tag / tool} {sec-stop=#1} + \@@_float_stop_sect: + \@@_float_init_collect: + }, + flush-float .default:n = Document + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% We need at least one pair +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{begindocument/end}[latex-lab/float] + {\@@_float_init_collect:} +\AddToHook{tagpdf/finish/before}[latex-lab/float] + {\par\__tag_sec_end:n{-10}\@@_float_stop_sect:} +\DeclareHookRule{tagpdf/finish/before}{latex-lab/float}{before}{tagpdf} +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsection{Splitting floats} +% \begin{macro}{split-float} +% TODO: check if the target affect spacing!! +% \begin{macrocode} +\keys_define:nn { tag / tool} + { + split-float .code:n = + { + \@@_float_end: + \@@_float_begin: + \MakeLinkTarget[tagstructure]{g__tag_struct_abs_int} + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} + +% \subsection{Patching} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_float_stop_par:,\@@_float_start_par:} +% if a float is in a par, we need commands to stop and restart the P-mc +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_float_stop_par: + { + \tag_mc_end: + \bool_if:NF \g_@@_float_sect_bool + { + \tag_struct_end: + } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_float_start_par: + { + \bool_if:NF \g_@@_float_sect_bool + { + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=text}% + } + \tag_mc_begin:n{tag=P} + } + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% These commands are the main commands to start and end the float tagging. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_float_begin: + {% +% \end{macrocode} +% We test if the float structure should be included directly or move to a dedicated section. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bool_if:NTF\g_@@_float_sect_bool + { + \exp_args:Ne + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=float,parent=0\prop_item:No\g_@@_float_sect_prop{\@captype-struct}}% + \prop_gput:Nxx \g_@@_float_sect_prop {\@captype-used}{true} + } + { + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=float} + } + \tl_set:Nx\@current@float@struct{\tag_get:n{struct_num}}% + \typeout{Float structure: \@current@float@struct} + } + +\cs_new_protected:Npn\@@_float_end:{\tag_struct_end:} %end Aside + +% \end{macrocode} +% This patches the main command \cs{@xfloat}. +% There is a : in the code, so we disable expl3 syntax +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOff +\def\@xfloat #1[#2]{% + \@nodocument + \def \@captype {#1}% + \def \@fps {#2}% + \@onelevel@sanitize \@fps + \def \reserved@b {!}% + \ifx \reserved@b \@fps + \@fpsadddefault + \else + \ifx \@fps \@empty + \@fpsadddefault + \fi + \fi + \ifhmode + \@bsphack +% \end{macrocode} +% If the float is in hmode we have to interrupt the P +% \begin{macrocode} + \@nameuse{@@_float_stoppar:} %<---end P + \@floatpenalty -\@Mii + \else + \@floatpenalty-\@Miii + \fi + \ifinner + \@parmoderr\@floatpenalty\z@ + \else + \@next\@currbox\@freelist + {% + \@tempcnta \sixt@@@@n + \expandafter \@tfor \expandafter \reserved@a + \expandafter :\expandafter =\@fps + \do + {% + \if \reserved@a h% + \ifodd \@tempcnta + \else + \advance \@tempcnta \@ne + \fi + \else\if \reserved@a t% + \@setfpsbit \tw@ + \else\if \reserved@a b% + \@setfpsbit 4% + \else\if \reserved@a p% + \@setfpsbit 8% + \else\if \reserved@a !% + \ifnum \@tempcnta>15 + \advance\@tempcnta -\sixt@@@@n\relax + \fi + \else + \@latex@error{Unknown float option `\reserved@a'}% + {Option `\reserved@a' ignored and `p' used.}% + \@setfpsbit 8% + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + }% + \@tempcntb \csname ftype@\@captype \endcsname + \multiply \@tempcntb \@xxxii + \advance \@tempcnta \@tempcntb + \global \count\@currbox \@tempcnta + }% + \@fltovf + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% This starts the structure for the float. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@nameuse{@@_float_begin:}% + \global \setbox\@currbox + \color@vbox + \normalcolor + \vbox \bgroup + \hsize\columnwidth + \@parboxrestore + \@floatboxreset +% \end{macrocode} +% We add a target for links. TODO: check that it doesn't affect spacing!! +% \begin{macrocode} + \MakeLinkTarget[tagstructure]{g__tag_struct_abs_int}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% The end code of the float ... +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\end@float{% + \@endfloatbox + \@nameuse{@@_float_end:}% + \ifnum\@floatpenalty <\z@ + \@largefloatcheck + \@cons\@currlist\@currbox + \ifnum\@floatpenalty <-\@Mii + \penalty -\@Miv + \@tempdima\prevdepth + \vbox{}% + \prevdepth\@tempdima + \penalty\@floatpenalty + \else + \vadjust{\penalty -\@Miv \vbox{}\penalty\@floatpenalty}\@Esphack + \@nameuse{@@_float_start_par:} %restart P safe here?? + \fi + \fi +} +\ExplSyntaxOn +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Handling captions} +% +% To avoid that hyperref interferes we disable its patches: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\hyper@nopatch@caption{} +% \end{macrocode} +% As we will use the structure number in the target, we need to provide a +% theH-representation. (Once the kernel will create +% theH-representation generally this will be provided automatically, as tagpdf uses +% \cs{newcounter}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\providecommand\theHg__tag_struct_abs_int{\int_use:N\c@g__tag_struct_abs_int} +% \end{macrocode} + +% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption} +% \cs{@makecaption} is defined by the classes so we overwrite it for now +% at begin document. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{begindocument} + { + \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% + \vskip\abovecaptionskip + \xdef\@currentHref{tagstructure.\@current@float@struct}% +% \end{macrocode} +% we don't want tagging when storing the caption for the singleline check +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_stop:n{caption} + \sbox\@tempboxa{#1:~#2}% + \tag_start:n{caption} +% \end{macrocode} +% we stop paratagging. TODO: check +% \begin{macrocode} + \tagtool{para=false} + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Caption,parent=\@current@float@struct} +% \end{macrocode} +% move the caption to the begin of the float structure: +% \begin{macrocode} + \seq_gpop_right:cN {g__tag_struct_kids_\@current@float@struct _seq}\l_@@_tmpa_tl + \seq_gput_left:cV {g__tag_struct_kids_\@current@float@struct _seq}\l_@@_tmpa_tl + \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Lbl} + \tag_mc_begin:n{} + #1:~ + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_end: + \tag_mc_begin:n{} + #2\par + \tag_mc_end: + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% we don't reuse the box as it doesn't contain tagging, but set the text explicitly. +% \begin{macrocode} + \global \@minipagefalse + \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Lbl} + \tag_mc_begin:n{} + #1:~ + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_end: + \tag_mc_begin:n{} + #2\par + \tag_mc_end:\hfil}% + \fi + \tag_struct_end: %caption + \vskip\belowcaptionskip} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%</package> +% \end{macrocode} + +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latex-lab> +\ProvidesFile{float-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [2023-04-30 v0.8 code related to the tagging of floats] +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-float} +%</latex-lab> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{implementation} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-footnotes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-footnotes.dtx index 6fe7ff6955a..4c8c9b73a61 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-footnotes.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-footnotes.dtx @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % %% File: latex-lab-footnotes.dtx -% Copyright (C) 2022 The LaTeX Project +% Copyright (C) 2022-2023 The LaTeX Project % % It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the % LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this @@ -53,19 +53,19 @@ % offering configurable methods for layout and functionality % adjustments that avoid overwriting each other when used in % classes as well as in packages (as far as possible --- obviously -% some adjustments are mutally exclusive). This is achieved by -% providing a a larger number of hooks (for areas where different +% some adjustments are mutually exclusive). This is achieved by +% providing a larger number of hooks (for areas where different % packages/classes can easily coexist with their adjustments) and a % number of configuration points to which only one class or package -% can write to successfully (in case of multiple changes the the +% can write to successfully (in case of multiple changes the % last one wins). The latter are for special functionality, e.g., % if footnote text is typeset as a single paragraph, it can't be configured % the same time to be typeset vertically with one footnote below % each other. % % The interfaces are set up to support tagged PDF, but in order -% for this to work, all packages altering the fontnote setup should -% use the inferfaces provided here and not do it through the +% for this to work, all packages altering the footnote setup should +% use the interfaces provided here and not do it through the % legacy methods (though there is some support for the latter as % well, but if will not work in a cases). % @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ % that was used by most document classes, % but \cs{@makefntext} had to be defined in the class itself because % the format didn't provide a default. As a result you will find -% definitions for the latter in all document classes and defintions +% definitions for the latter in all document classes and definitions % for \cs{@makefnmark} only in very few. % % Furthermore, to enable special footnote layouts or provide @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ % % In contrast the hooks are of interest to many classes to provide % their layout alterations in a way that it works smoothly with -% other packages handling aspects of foonote formatting. +% other packages handling aspects of footnote formatting. % % % \subsection{Formatting the mark in the main text} @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ % % Executed at the very beginning of \cs{footnotemark}. Currently % there are two packages (\pkg{bibarts} and \pkg{chextras}) that -% prepend material at this point (not ncessarily correctly, e.g., +% prepend material at this point (not necessarily correctly, e.g., % they do not all check that they are in horizontal mode). % % This hook is paired with hook \hook{fnmark/after}. @@ -163,15 +163,15 @@ % \item[\hook{fnmark/begin}] % % This hook is executed directly in front of the typeset mark. -% This is the place where \pkg{hyperref} adds part of its code, -% i.e., after the \cs{nobreak} mentioned above. With a closer -% integration of \pkg{hyperref} this hook may not be necessary at -% all. +% This is the place where \pkg{hyperref} would have added +% part of its code, i.e., after the \cs{nobreak} mentioned above. +% With the integration of hyperlinks in the tagging code +% this hook may not be necessary at all. % % \item[\hook{fnmark/end}] % % This hook is executed directly after the typeset mark. It is -% used by \pkg{hyperref}, \pkg{memhfixc}, \pkg{scrlttr2}, and +% used by \pkg{memhfixc}, \pkg{scrlttr2}, and % \pkg{footmisc}. Used, for example, to implement support for % multiple marks in succession. % @@ -227,9 +227,9 @@ % \item[\cs{@footnotetext@cfgpointiii} (no argument)] % % By default this configuration point adds a strut to the -% footnote material. so that consecutive footnotes are properly +% footnote material so that consecutive footnotes are properly % spaced vertically. In some use cases this is not appropriate -% (e.g., when running all footnotes s a single paragraph) and so +% (e.g., when running all footnotes as a single paragraph) and so % this configuration point can cancel the action or do something % else instead. % @@ -261,17 +261,18 @@ % % If tagging is produced this configuration point is also % responsible for surrounding the mark with the appropriate tags -% marking the mark as an Lbl. It does this using the command \cs{tag@FELbl}. +% marking the mark as an Lbl. It does this using the command +% \cs{tag@FENoteLbl}. % % \item[\cs{@makefntext@cfgpointii} (1 argument)] % % This configuration point manages the formatting of the footnote -% text once the mark has been typeset. +% text once the mark has been typeset. % % If tagging is produced this configuration point is also % responsible for surrounding the mark with the appropriate tags % marking the mark as an MC of type FENote. It does this using -% the command \cs{tag@FENote}. +% the command \cs{tag@FENotetext}. % % \end{description} % @@ -335,7 +336,7 @@ % % At the very end of \cs{footnotetext} we execute the hook % \hook{fntext/after} which is a reversed hook paired with -% \hook{fntext/before}. Some packages, e.g., \pkg{linuex}, have +% \hook{fntext/before}. Some packages, e.g., \pkg{linguex}, have % code in that position. % % \end{description} @@ -346,7 +347,7 @@ % \subsubsection{Additional configuration possibilities} % % The formatting of the footnote mark in front of the footnote -% texts is influenced by the setting of the dimen parameter +% text is influenced by the setting of the dimen parameter % \cs{footnotemargin}. By default its value is 1.8em in the current % text font (or \texttt{-}\cs{maxdimen} when the para option is % chosen). The following rules apply: @@ -381,7 +382,247 @@ % \end{itemize} % % -% \section{Tagging support} +% \section{Tagging and hyperlinking support} +% +% Footnotes consist of a \emph{footnotemark} (short: mark) that is typically placed in the text +% as a superscript number like this\footnotemark[1], and a \emph{footnotetext} +% (short: note) that is placed at the bottom of the page. +% The \emph{footnotetext} normally repeats at the begin the mark as a visual clue. +% +% Tagging (and hyperlinking) has to connect the mark with the note. +% For the tagging code, we assume that every mark has exactly one associated note, +% and that every note is associated to at least one mark +% and can have more associated marks. +% +% The mark doesn't need to be visible, e.g. the typesetted +% mark\textsuperscript{1--3} denotes three marks, where the second is invisible. +% Tagging should produce here probably three \texttt{Lbl} structures +% (one without content), and an artifact for the range marker. +% If such a range is used, links can only point to the notes 1 and 3 and +% one has to suppress the linking for the second mark. +% This means that links and tagging are also related +% to the actual formatting of the footnote mark. +% In the following this problem is mostly ignored for now, but +% should not be forgotten and handled later. +% +% \subsection{Technical details for the tagging} +% +% The \emph{footnotemark} should create a \texttt{/Lbl} structure\footnote{to make it easier +% to identify the role we use \texttt{/footnotemark} which we rolemap to \texttt{/Lbl}} that should contain a \texttt{/Ref} entry pointing +% to the structure of the \emph{footnotetext}. +% +% The \emph{footnotetext} should create a \texttt{/FENote}\footnote{We tag it as \texttt{/footnote} and role map it.} +% structure with a \texttt{/Ref} +% entry pointing to the structures of \emph{all} marks related to the note. +% The mark at the begin of the +% note is in a \texttt{/Lbl}\footnote{We tag it as \texttt{/footnotelabel}.} +% structure but has to fulfil no special requirements. +% +% Structure objects and the underlying properties used by the tagging +% code are initialized when the structure is opened. This means that one can not +% directly add data to a future structure +% but as structure objects are written at the end of the document it is +% possible to update \texttt{/Ref} entries in an end document hook. +% +% +% So tagging has to solve two problems: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item the mark and the footnote text must be surrounded by the correct structure +% and marked content commands. This is not trivial +% as there are various layouts (bottom, marginpar, minipage) and the tagging +% from the automatic paratagging must be taken into account if one want to avoid +% faulty nesting. +% +% \item It must detect which marks are related to which notes +% so that it can setup the \texttt{/Ref} cross-references. +% \end{itemize} +% +% +% \subsection{Requirements for links} +% +% Links should go from the mark to the note. Sometimes it has been requested +% that links go back too, but as there +% can be more than one mark connected to a note it is not clear how to decide to which mark it should go. +% Using the keys from the PDF viewer to go back is normally better. +% +% Links are closely related to the references stored in the \texttt{/Ref} +% entry of a mark and so are handled in the code together with them. +% But there are subtle technical differences to take care of +% as links and destinations are whatsits and so must be created at the correct time. +% +% It should be possible to suppress the links both globally and locally.\footnote{ +% Currently hyperref only offers the option to suppress the +% footnote links globally +% with the option \texttt{hyperfootnotes=false}. To suppress them locally +% only the \texttt{NoHyper} environment is provided.} +% +% +% \subsection{The algorithmus to connect marks and notes} +% +% +% The connection is made by comparing the value of \cs{@thefnmark}. +% +% The standard mark commands (\cs{footnotemark} and \cs{footnote}) +% store the current value of \cs{@thefnmark} +% with their own structure number as a key in a property. +% +% A following \cs{footnotetext} compares its own \cs{@thefnmark} with the values in +% the prop. If there is a match it stores the structure numbers and removes the entries +% from the properties (so in a normal document the property will never contain more than +% a few entries). +% +% This works well as long as the \cs{footnotemark} commands are issued before the \cs{footnotetext} and +% as long as nothing unusual is done to \cs{@thefnmark}. +% It also works if a document uses more than one footnote series as long as they have distinct numbering +% systems, but in case a distinction is needed it is possible to define +% a new data structure and to switch locally to use this +% container. The following three commands are used for this. +% +% The default property uses the name \texttt{default} +% +% \begin{function}{\fnote_new:nn} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{fnote_new:nn}\Arg{name}\Arg{key/value option} +% \end{syntax} +% +% This commands set up the needed data structure. Currently this only +% consists of a property which is used to store and manage the mark values. +% There are no options yet. +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{function}{\fnote_mark_gput:nn,\fnote_mark_gput:no,\fnote_mark_gput:oo} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{fnote_mark_gput:nn}\Arg{mark}\Arg{footnote type name} +% \end{syntax} +% This command stores the current structure number as key and the \meta{mark} as +% value in the property associated with the \meta{footnote type name} +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{function}{\fnote_mark_gpop:nnN} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{fnote_mark_gpop:nnN}\Arg{mark}\Arg{footnote type name}\meta{sequence} +% \end{syntax} +% This command stores the keys/structure numbers whose value are \meta{mark} in the +% property associated with \meta{footnote type name} in the \meta{sequence} +% and then remove them from the property. The content of the sequence can then be +% used to create link targets and references. +% \end{function} +% +% +% \subsubsection{\cs{footref}} +% +% \cs{footref} use internally the same command to set the mark as \cs{footnotemark}, it only +% defines \cs{@thefnmark} differently. This \cs{@thefnmark} is not suitable for the method described +% above, as it contains a reference command it can't be used to match a note, also \cs{footref} can +% be used after the note has already been set. \cs{footref} disables therefore the automatic detection. +% +% Instead the \cs{label} command is (currently with the help of a hook from the \texttt{nameref} package) +% extended in the \cs{footnotetext} command to also store the structure number and \cs{footref} retrieves this +% number to setup the reference and the link. +% +% The structure related to the \cs{footref} is added to the end of the \texttt{/Ref} array of the note and so the +% \texttt{/Ref} array doesn't necessarly reflect the order of the marks in the document. It would probably +% be possible to change this, but it is not clear if it actually matters and so it worth the additional coding +% and processing. +% +% \subsubsection{\cs{footnotemark} after \cs{footnotetext}} +% +% The automatic detection doesn't work if a \cs{footnotemark} is issued after +% the \cs{footnotetext} it refers to. There will be no error, but neither the link nor +% the \texttt{/Ref} will connect both. +% +% The simple way to handle this is to use a label and \cs{footref}: +% +% \begin{verbatim} +% \footnotetext{\label{fn:a}text} ... \footref{fn:a} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% An alternative would be to extend the syntax of \cs{footnotemark} and +% \cs{footnotetext} to allow to add a label which can then be used. +% For example +% +% \begin{verbatim} +% \footnotetext[label=fn:a]{text} ... \footnotemark[label=fn:a] +% \end{verbatim} +% +% As both have already an optional argument, that requires the optional argument extension. +% +% +% \subsection{Links} +% +% The structure numbers detected for the \texttt{/Ref} are also used for links: +% even if tagging is not activated the tagging commands are defined through +% the \pkg{tagpdf-base} package +% and the structure commands increase the structure counter and this info can be used. +% +% A \cs{footnotetext} creates a bunch of destinations (in most cases this sums up to +% two destinations): one for every structure number in the \texttt{/Ref} (used as target +% by the mark commands) and one for the structure number of the footnotetest itself +% (used as target by \cs{footref}s commands). +% +% \subsection{Implementation details} +% +% \subsection{Handling the mark} +% +% The mark in the text is handled by redefining the kernel configuration point +% \cs{@kernel@process@makefnmark} to \cs{tag@FEMark}. +% It takes one argument, \cs{@makefnmark}, the command which formats the +% mark, and surrounds it by link and tagging commands. +% At the point where \cs{@kernel@process@makefnmark} is issued \cs{@thefnmark} has already been +% defined and can be used to setup the reference detections. +% +% +% \subsection{Handling the footnotetext} +% +% The main part is done by redefining \cs{@kernel@process@footnotetext}. This configuration point takes two arguments, \cs{@footnotetext@cfgpoint} (by default \verb+\insert\footins+) and as second argument lots of code related to typesetting the notemark and the footnote text with the actual content of the footnote text somewhere in the middle. +% +% The redefinition of \cs{@kernel@process@footnotetext} surrounds the content with the structure command +% and tries to detect to which mark the note is related. +% +% The actual typesetting of the note text is done +% by \cs{@makefntext}/\cs{fnote_makefntext:n}. In the new implementation this contains two configuration +% points, \cs{@makefntext@cfgpoint} and \cs{@makefntext@cfgpointii}. These are redefined to add the tagging commands around note mark and note text. +% +% \subsection{Footnotes in minipages} +% +% In minipages the \cs{footnote} command uses a special marker +% (small italic letters by default) and puts the +% footnote text at the bottom of the box. The \cs{footnotemark} +% command uses the standard footnote counter and marker (and so typically +% creates a superscript number). +% It is meant to be used with a \cs{footnotetext} \emph{outside} +% the minipage to create a footnote mark which refers to a footnote text +% at the bottom of the page. +% This means to repeat a footnote marker in a minipage you should use the \cs{footref} command. +% +% Tagging works quite similar to normal footnotes if the new definition is used +% and if the minipage code is changed to use the new configuration point. +% The main problem here is currently the tagging of the minipage itself. +% +% \section{TODOs} +% +% \begin{itemize} +% +% \item tagging destroys footnotes directly following the text with pdflatex. +% +% \item there is a dependency on nameref as it provides the hook in \cs{label} +% used by the \cs{footref} code. +% +% \item there is a dependency to etoolbox as we patch \cs{\@iiiminipage} +% +% \item Special formatting of footnote marks in the text, e.g. if ranges or commas are +% used require special care as they should normally mark up such text as artifacts and +% perhaps have to insert empty structures to represent an invisible mark. This must be coordinated +% with the relevant packages and classes. +% +% \item manyfoot doesn't work correctly and must be analyzed. +% +% \item Check if additional kernel configuration points are needed/possible +% to avoid the redefinitions of \cs{@makefntext@cfgpoint} and \cs{@makefntext@cfgpointii}. +% +% \item \pkg{memoir} is not supported at all and errors when the code tries to patch +% \cs{@makefntext}. +% \end{itemize} % % \emph{To be documented} % @@ -403,46 +644,171 @@ % \subsection{File declaration} % \begin{macrocode} \ProvidesFile{latex-lab-footnotes.ltx} - [2022-07-22 v0.6b changes to the footnote interfaces] + [2023-02-04 v0.7 changes to the footnote interfaces] % \end{macrocode} % +% \subsection{code not fully handled yet} % \begin{macrocode} - +% % latex.ltx +% not looked at yet +% \@mpfootnotetext is probably no longer needed, or only to support other +% classes and package. See below about the minipage code. +% +% \long\def\@mpfootnotetext#1{% +% \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{% +% \unvbox\@mpfootins +% \reset@font\footnotesize +% \hsize\columnwidth +% \@parboxrestore +% \def\@currentcounter{mpfootnote}% +% \protected@edef\@currentlabel +% {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}% +% \color@begingroup +% \@makefntext{% +% \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}% +% \par +% \color@endgroup}} +% ======== +% used by the minipage footnote code. +% +% \def\@mpfn{footnote} +% \def\thempfn{\thefootnote} +% ========= +% this perhaps need some configuration options. +% +%\def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}} +% +% ========= +%% alterations not covered: +% +% ./arabtex/afoot.sty --- too different (and probably too old) +% +% ===== +% alterations of footnotetext not covered: +% +% ./revtex4-1/revtex4-1.cls ./revtex/ltxutil.sty ./revtex/revtex4-2.cls ... (need analysis) +% ./bigfoot/bigfoot.sty +% +% memoir needs checking too +% +% ===== +% +% use of kerns to mark h-mode positions (unit sp) +% +% 1 = CJK +% 2 = CJK +% 3 = multiple footnotes (footmisc, koma, eledmac, tufte, memoir, +% parnotes, sidenotes) +% 3 = outer kern in letter spacing (letterspace) +% 3 = beginning of list (examdesign.cls) +% 4 = CJK pigin +% 5 = CJK ruby - % not looked at yet - -\long\def\@mpfootnotetext#1{% - \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{% - \unvbox\@mpfootins - \reset@font\footnotesize - \hsize\columnwidth - \@parboxrestore - \def\@currentcounter{mpfootnote}% - \protected@edef\@currentlabel - {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}% - \color@begingroup - \@makefntext{% - \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}% - \par - \color@endgroup}} - - -\def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}} - - - -\def\@mpfn{footnote} -\def\thempfn{\thefootnote} - - - +% 1-4 = polyglossia for korean +% +% \end{macrocode} %------------------------------------- - - +% \begin{macrocode} \ExplSyntaxOn +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsection{Temporary variables} +% \begin{macrocode} +\prop_new:N \l_@@_tmpa_prop +\tl_new:N \l_@@_tmpa_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsection{Public variables} +% +% A footnote mark will store its structure number (key) and the +% expanded \cs{@thefnmark} in this prop so +% that a following note can retrieve this info +% if needed. It is possible to use more than one footnote series (type) +% if needed (if different footnotes/note use the same +% numbering system). +% If this command is changed an accompanying property must be created +% \begin{NOTE}{UF} +% TODO: interface to create the property.\\ +% TODO: check and decide about the name of the tl +% \end{NOTE} +% \begin{macro}{\l_fnote_type_tl} +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_fnote_type_tl +\tl_set:Nn \l_fnote_type_tl {default} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% It must be possible to suppress the hyperlinking, both locally +% and globally. hyperref's hyperfootnotes option should set the boolean. +% \begin{macro}{\l_fnote_link_bool} +% \begin{macrocode} +\bool_new:N \l_fnote_link_bool +\bool_set_true:N \l_fnote_link_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% A hyperlink should have an changeable link type. This can +% be e.g. used to change the color or the border. +% \begin{macro}{\l_fnote_link_type_tl} +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_fnote_link_type_tl +\tl_set:Nn \l_fnote_link_type_tl {link} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Internal variables} +% +% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_linktarget_tl} +% This command stores the name of a linktarget/destination +% when needed +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_linktarget_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_currentlabel_tl} +% This command is used to pass a label name around. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_currentlabel_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} - +% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_currentrefs_seq} +% This sequence stores the list of reference of a note +% \begin{macrocode} +\seq_new:N \l_@@_currentrefs_seq +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% The connection between the mark(s) in the text and the note +% is either deduced automatically or done through an label. +% The default is automatic, but we must be able to suppress it. For this we use a boolean. +% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_autodetect_bool} +% \begin{macrocode} +\bool_new:N \l_@@_autodetect_bool +\bool_set_true:N \l_@@_autodetect_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% This is used to pass the structure number of the note around, e.g. +% to a label inside the note. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_currentstruct_tl +\tl_set:Nn \l_@@_currentstruct_tl {1} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \subsection{Variants} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \ref_label:nn { Vn } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \ref_value:nn { Vn } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \prop_gput:Nnn {cxn} +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \hook_gput_code:nnn{nne} +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tag_struct_use:n {e} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Updating \cs{@thefnmark}} +% \begin{macro}{\fnote_step_fnmark:nn} +% This command updates \cs{@thefnmark}. The first argument +% is an optional integer expression, the second a counter name. +% If the optional argument is not given it steps the counter. +% \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_step_fnmark:nn #1#2 { \tl_if_novalue:nTF {#1} { @@ -463,7 +829,12 @@ \group_end: } } - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\fnote_set_fnmark:nn} +% This is similar to the previous command, but it doesn't step the +% counter but use the current value. +% \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_set_fnmark:nn #1#2 { \tl_if_novalue:nTF {#1} { @@ -476,25 +847,40 @@ \group_end: } } - -%------------------------------------- - -% the debugging code is just temp -\bool_new:N \g_fnote_debug_bool -\bool_gset_true:N \g_fnote_debug_bool % for now we have debugging turned on by default - -%------------------------------------- - - - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Hooks} +% +% Hooks in the footnotemark command. +% \begin{macrocode} \NewMirroredHookPair{fnmark/before}{fnmark/after} \NewHook{fnmark} \NewHook{fnmark/begin} \NewHook{fnmark/end} - - -\cs_new:Npn \@@_debug_footnotemark: { - \bool_if:NT \g_fnote_debug_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% Hooks in the footnotetext command +% \begin{macrocode} +\NewMirroredHookPair{fntext/before}{fntext/after} +\NewHook{fntext} +\NewHook{fntext/para} +\NewHook{fntext/begin} +\NewHook{fntext/end} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Debugging code} +% the debugging code is just temporary +% +% For now we have debugging turned on by default +% \begin{macrocode} +\bool_new:N \g_fnote_debug_bool +\bool_gset_true:N \g_fnote_debug_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% We log the hooks in the footnote mark command, but only once +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_debug_footnotemark: + { + \bool_if:NT \g_fnote_debug_bool { \LogHook{fnmark/before} \LogHook{fnmark} @@ -503,9 +889,38 @@ \LogHook{fnmark/after} \cs_gset_eq:NN \@@_debug_footnotemark: \prg_do_nothing: } -} - - + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Similar for the footnotetext +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_debug_footnotetext: + { + \bool_if:NT \g_fnote_debug_bool + { + \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpoint + \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpointii + \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpointiii + \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpointiv + \cs_log:N\@makefntext@cfgpoint + \cs_log:N\@makefntext@cfgpointii + \LogHook{fntext/before} + \LogHook{fntext} + \LogHook{fntext/para} + \LogHook{fntext/begin} + \LogHook{fntext/end} + \LogHook{fntext/after} +% \end{macrocode} +% Show the info only once (if at all). +% \begin{macrocode} + \cs_gset_eq:NN \@@_debug_footnotetext: \prg_do_nothing: + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{The new \cs{@footnotemark} command} +% \begin{macro}{\fnote_footnotemark:} +% This is the main command which will replace \cs{@footnotemark}. +% \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_footnotemark: { \@@_debug_footnotemark: %------- @@ -535,17 +950,20 @@ % \end{macrocode} % If a footnote mark is placed by its own then it should finish by % executing \hook{fnmark/end}, resetting the space factor, and -% finishing with \hook{fnmark/after}. However, inf a complete +% finishing with \hook{fnmark/after}. However, in a complete % footnote these actions have to happen only after we have handled -% the footnote text (e.g., by placing it into an \cs{insert}. In +% the footnote text (e.g., by placing it into an \cs{insert}). In % such a situation \cs{_@@_footmark_finish:} below does nothing % and the action is carried out later. % \begin{macrocode} \@@_footnotemark_finish: } - - -\cs_new:Npn \@@_finish: { +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_finish:,\@@_footnotemark_finish:} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_finish: { % hyperref.sty % memhfixc.sty --- could move fnmark/after % scrlttr2.cls --- could vanish if footmisc uses a hook @@ -561,57 +979,30 @@ %------- } - \cs_new_eq:NN \@@_footnotemark_finish: \@@_finish: - - - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@kernel@process@makefnmark} % Not a public config point but the kernel hook to add tagging +% \begin{macrocode} \def \@kernel@process@makefnmark { } - - -% alterations not covered: +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -% ./arabtex/afoot.sty --- too different (and probably too old) - - -% Provide the name \LaTeXe{} is used to. - +% \begin{macro}{\@footnotemark} +% At last provide the name \LaTeXe{} is used to. +% \begin{macrocode} \cs_set_eq:NN \@footnotemark \fnote_footnotemark: - - - -%------------------------------------- - -\NewMirroredHookPair{fntext/before}{fntext/after} -\NewHook{fntext} -\NewHook{fntext/para} -\NewHook{fntext/begin} -\NewHook{fntext/end} - - -\cs_new:Npn \@@_debug_footnotetext: { - \bool_if:NT \g_fnote_debug_bool - { - \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpoint - \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpointii - \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpointiii - \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpointiv - \cs_log:N\@makefntext@cfgpoint - \cs_log:N\@makefntext@cfgpointii - \LogHook{fntext/before} - \LogHook{fntext} - \LogHook{fntext/para} - \LogHook{fntext/begin} - \LogHook{fntext/end} - \LogHook{fntext/after} % \end{macrocode} -% Show the info only once (if at all). +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \subsection{The new \cs{@footnotetext} command} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\fnote_footnotetext:n} % \begin{macrocode} - \cs_gset_eq:NN \@@_debug_footnotetext: \prg_do_nothing: - } - } - \cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_footnotetext:n #1 { \@@_debug_footnotetext: %------- @@ -690,55 +1081,75 @@ \UseHook{fntext/after} %------- } - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext@cfgpoint} % default for config point (1 arg) +% \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@footnotetext@cfgpoint { \insert\footins } - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext@cfgpointii} % default for config point (1 arg) +% \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@footnotetext@cfgpointii { \@makefntext } - - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext@cfgpointiii} % default for config point (0 args) +% \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@footnotetext@cfgpointiii { \rule\z@\footnotesep } - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext@cfgpointiv} % default for config point (0 args) +% \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@footnotetext@cfgpointiv { \@finalstrut\strutbox } - - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@kernel@process@footnotetext} % kernel hook for tagging (2 args) +% \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@kernel@process@footnotetext {} - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% % Provide the name \LaTeXe{} is used to and do this unconditionally % (no patching of class code if any). This means that if a class provides it own % definition that gets lost and if necessary needs to be handled -% with firstaid (or updating of the class. - -\AddToHook{begindocument}{ - \cs_set_eq:NN \@footnotetext \fnote_footnotetext:n -} - -% alterations not covered: +% with firstaid (or updating of the class). +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{begindocument} + { + \cs_set_eq:NN \@footnotetext \fnote_footnotetext:n + } +% \end{macrocode} % -% ./revtex4-1/revtex4-1.cls ./revtex/ltxutil.sty ./revtex/revtex4-2.cls ... (need analysis) -% ./bigfoot/bigfoot.sty - - - -% \footnotemargin is the logic implemented by footmisc. Perhaps we +% \subsection{The new \cs{@makefntext} command} +% +% \cs{footnotemargin} is the logic implemented by footmisc. Perhaps we % don't want to do this like that in the kernel but for now I have % used this interface unchanged. - - +% \begin{macrocode} \newdimen\footnotemargin \footnotemargin\maxdimen % no value given -\AtBeginDocument{ - \ifdim \footnotemargin=\maxdimen - \setlength\footnotemargin{1.8em} - \fi -} - +\AtBeginDocument + { + \ifdim \footnotemargin=\maxdimen + \setlength\footnotemargin{1.8em} + \fi + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\fnote_makefntext:n} +% \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_makefntext:n #1 { % \end{macrocode} % Some classes in their redefinition for \cs{@makefntext} have @@ -765,36 +1176,45 @@ \@makefntext@cfgpointii { #1 } } - - - - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext@cfgpoint} % default for config point (1 arg) +% \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@makefntext@cfgpoint { \noindent } - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext@cfgpointii} % default for config point (1 arg) +% \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@makefntext@cfgpointii #1 { #1 } % \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % +% \subsubsection{Making documents use the new \cs{@makefntext}} % +% If the definition for \cs{@makefntext} is that of the standard +% classes then replace it with \cs{fnote_makefntext:n}, otherwise +% try to patch the definition. % -% If the definition for \cs{@makefntext} is that of the standard -% classes then replace it with \cs{fnote_makefntext:n}, otherwise -% try to patch the definition. +% Here is the definition the way it is in +% \texttt{classes.dtx}. Notice that (for saving space) there is no +% space after \texttt{em} to terminate the assignment. We need to +% mimic that, otherwise a test would return false even if the +% definition has not been modified. % -% Here is the the definition the way it is in -% \texttt{classes.dtx}. Notice that (for saving space) there is no -% space after \texttt{em} to terminate the assignment. We need to -% mimic that, otherwise a test would return false even if the -% definition has not been modified. % +% \begin{macro}{\old@std@class@makefntext} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand\old@std@class@makefntext[1]{% \parindent 1em% \noindent \hb@xt@1.8em{\hss\@makefnmark}#1} - % \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% % Here is the messy code for patching. Note that this is only there % to help classes along that aren't updated yet so it does some % minimal patching to hopefully add configuration points in the @@ -822,7 +1242,6 @@ % \cs{@makefnmark} without surrounding it in a box and if that % fails it gives up with an \cs{ERROR} (which needs to get a proper definition). % \begin{macrocode} - \tl_new:N \l_@@_patch_tl \cs_new_eq:NN \@@_tmp:w \ERROR @@ -853,6 +1272,7 @@ %\begin{verbatim} % AAA \@makefntext@processX { \hbox BBB } %\end{verbatim} +% % \begin{macrocode} \cs_new:Npn \@@_patch_hbox:w #1 \hbox #2 # { \exp_stop_f: #1 \@makefntext@processX { \hbox #2 } } @@ -869,25 +1289,27 @@ % different structure so this is a simple reshuffling. Would be % better if we can patch the right structure in directly, but I'm % not a patch person, so this is the simple way out for now: -% +% % \begin{macrocode} \cs_new:Npn \@makefntext@processX #1#2{\@makefntext@cfgpoint{#1{#2}}} % \end{macrocode} +% % At \verb=\begin{document}= check if the current definition is % that of the standard classes and if so replace it by % \cs{fnote_makefntext:n} otherwise try and patch the definition % using the approach above. % \begin{macrocode} -\AddToHook{begindocument}{ - \cs_if_eq:NNTF \@makefntext \old@std@class@makefntext - { - \cs_set_eq:NN \@makefntext \fnote_makefntext:n - } - { - \@@_patch: - } -} +\AddToHook{begindocument} + { + \cs_if_eq:NNTF \@makefntext \old@std@class@makefntext + { + \cs_set_eq:NN \@makefntext \fnote_makefntext:n + } + { + \@@_patch: + } + } % possibly add the following to check for multiple \hbox in @@ -898,63 +1320,112 @@ % % \end{macrocode} % +% \subsection{Document-level commands} % +% \begin{macro}{\footnotetext} +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareDocumentCommand\footnotetext {o+m} + { + \fnote_set_fnmark:nn {#1} \@mpfn + \@footnotetext {#2} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % % -% \subsection{Document-level commands} -% -% \changes{v0.6b}{2022/07/22}{Make mandatory arguments of \cs{footnote} -% and \cs{footnotetext} long (gh863)} +% \begin{macro}{\footnote} % \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareDocumentCommand\footnote {o+m} + { + \fnote_step_fnmark:nn {#1} \@mpfn + \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_footnotemark_finish: \prg_do_nothing: + \@footnotemark + \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_footnotemark_finish: \@@_finish: + \@footnotetext {#2} + \@@_footnotemark_finish: + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% -\DeclareDocumentCommand\footnotetext {o+m} { - \fnote_set_fnmark:nn {#1} \@mpfn - \@footnotetext {#2} -} - - -%------------------------------------- - - -\DeclareDocumentCommand\footnote {o+m} { - \fnote_step_fnmark:nn {#1} \@mpfn - \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_footnotemark_finish: \prg_do_nothing: - \@footnotemark - \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_footnotemark_finish: \@@_finish: - \@footnotetext {#2} - \@@_footnotemark_finish: -} - -%------------------------------------- - - -\DeclareDocumentCommand\footnotemark {o} { - \fnote_step_fnmark:nn {#1} { footnote } - \@footnotemark -} - - -%------------------------------------- - -\DeclareDocumentCommand\footref {m}{% - \begingroup - \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\ref{#1}}% - \endgroup - \@footnotemark -} - +% \begin{macro}{\footnotemark} +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareDocumentCommand\footnotemark {o} + { + \fnote_step_fnmark:nn {#1} { footnote } + \@footnotemark + } % \end{macrocode} -% +% \end{macro} + +% \begin{macro}{\footref} +% \cs{footref} used the starred \cs{ref} in \cs{@thefnmark} +% as the linking is handled by the tagging code inside +% the \cs{@footnotemark}. +% \cs{footref} should not try to link to its related related +% note automatically but should instead use the label. +% This is passed to \cs{@footnotemark} through +% \cs{l__fnote_currentlabel_tl}. +% % \begin{macrocode} -%<@@=> +\DeclareDocumentCommand\footref {m} + { + \begingroup + \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\ref*{#1}}% + \endgroup + \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_autodetect_bool + \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_currentlabel_tl {#1} + \@footnotemark + \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_autodetect_bool + } % \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % % +% \subsection{Firstaid for packages and classes} % +% \subsection{Kernel patches} +% Tagging of footnotes in minipages require a change in the minipage commands +% We define at first a local configuration command for minipage footnotes. % +% TODO remove the dependency to etoolbox, and need for the patch. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@mpfootnotetext@cfgpoint #1 + { + \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{% + \unvbox\@mpfootins + #1 + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Then we patch \cs{@iiiminipage} +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{etoolbox} +\ExplSyntaxOff +\patchcmd\@iiiminipage + {\let\@footnotetext\@mpfootnotetext} + {\let\@footnotetext@cfgpoint\@mpfootnotetext@cfgpoint} + {}{\ERROR} +\ExplSyntaxOn +% \end{macrocode} % +% \subsubsection{\pkg{memoir}} +% The \pkg{memoir} class redefines various internal commands to inject its +% hooks and addtional code. The following reinstates the kernel command and +% so probably breaks various options of \pkg{memoir}, but without the +% changes it errors anyway. The \pkg{footmisc} package should be used to change +% for example to para footnotes. % -% \subsection{Firstaid for packages and classes} +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{class/memoir/before} + { \let\new@std@class@makecol\@makecol } +\AddToHook{class/memoir/after} + { + \cs_set_eq:NN \@footnotemark \fnote_footnotemark: + \cs_set_eq:NN \@makefntext\old@std@class@makefntext + \cs_set_eq:NN \@makecol\new@std@class@makecol + } +% \end{macrocode} % % \subsubsection{\pkg{setspace}} % @@ -967,156 +1438,410 @@ % \end{macrocode} % % -% -% % \subsubsection{\pkg{hyperref}} % -% Prevent hyperref from redefining footnote stuff --- this is a -% temp solution. +% hyperref has a hook which allows to disable its footnote +% related patches. As we will handle links directly in the code +% this is used. +% % \begin{macrocode} -\AddToHook{package/hyperref/after}{ - \let\H@@footnotetext\fnote_footnotetext:n - \let\H@@footnotemark\fnote_footnotemark: - \let \@footnotetext \fnote_footnotetext:n - \let \@footnotemark \fnote_footnotemark: -} - - - +\def\hyper@nopatch@footnote{} % \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Stuff that needs cleanup and documentation} -% +% We use the hyperref commands for now for links. To avoid +% to have to test for hyperref we provide dummies. +% TODO consider to use specials to get similar spacing. % \begin{macrocode} - - -%------------------------------------- - -% use of kerns to mark h-mode positions (unit sp) +\AtBeginDocument + { + \providecommand\hyper@linkstart{\@gobbletwo} + \providecommand\hyper@linkend{\@empty} + } +% \end{macrocode} % -% 1 = CJK -% 2 = CJK -% 3 = multiple footnotes (footmisc, koma, eledmac, tufte, memoir, -% parnotes, sidenotes) -% 3 = outer kern in letter spacing (letterspace) -% 3 = beginning of list (examdesign.cls) -% 4 = CJK pigin -% 5 = CJK ruby - -% 1-4 = polyglossia for korean - -%------------------------------------- - - - -%------------------------------------- -% Tagging -%------------------------------------- - -% hyperref support only when loaded (improve integration) - -\newcounter{absfootnote} -\AddToHook{fnmark/begin}{\stepcounter{absfootnote}} % too simple (fails with opt args) - - - -% this is rubbish and should be handled better: - -\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag_if_loaded:TF { \cs_if_exist:NTF \tag_struct_begin:n } - - - -\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag@FEMark #1 { - \tag_if_loaded:TF +% It must be possible to suppress the hyperlinking, both locally +% and globally. hyperref should set the boolean \cs{l_fnote_link_bool}. +% For now we test for the hyperref boolean (so it can be suppressed only globally). +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument + { + \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref} { - \tag_mc_end_push: - \exp_args:Nx - \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Lbl,ref=fn.\the\c@absfootnote} - \tag_mc_begin:n{tag=Lbl} - \IfPackageLoadedTF{hyperref}{ \hyper@linkstart - {link}{fn.\the\c@absfootnote} }{} - #1 - \IfPackageLoadedTF{hyperref}{ \hyper@linkend }{} - \tag_mc_end: - \tag_struct_end: - \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{} + \legacy_if:nF{Hy@hyperfootnotes}{\bool_set_false:N \l_fnote_link_bool} } - { #1 } -} - -% to be done next round around: + { + \bool_set_false:N \l_fnote_link_bool + } + } +% \end{macrocode} % -% \the\c@absfootnote should be replaced directly by some command with default meaning -% \the\c@absfootnote so that the actual reference can be changed from the outside. +% \subsection{Tagging and hyperlink code} +% \subsubsection{Rolemap for structure tags} +% We use role-mapping to get more speaking names +% in the PDF and so ease debugging. These names are already +% provided by tagpdf directly. +% +% \subsubsection{Extending the label system} +% For \cs{footref} and (perhaps later for labeled footnotes) +% we must extend the label system. +% Beside the normal values we also need the structure number of the note. +% We use the \pkg{nameref} hook until latex provides a hook for its label. +% At first we define a suitable attribute, it uses as value the structure +% number of the note as stored in \cs{l__fnote_currentstruct_tl} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ref_attribute_gset:nnnn {fnote/struct}{1}{now}{\l_@@_currentstruct_tl} +% \end{macrocode} % -% there are several instances that are curently hardwired. - -\cs_set_eq:NN \@kernel@process@makefnmark \tag@FEMark - - - -% kernel hook for tagging (2 args) -\cs_set:Npn \@kernel@process@footnotetext #1#2 { - \tag_if_loaded:TF +% We add a hook to the \pkg{nameref} hook. By default it does nothing +% \begin{macro}{\@@_label_hook:} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_label_hook: {} +\AddToHook{begindocument/before} + { + \RequirePackage{nameref} + \g@addto@macro\label@hook + { + \@@_label_hook: + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% Inside a footnotetext we change the hook to store the structure number too. +% nameref provides the name of label in \cs{label@name}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{fntext/begin} + { + \cs_set_protected:Npn \@@_label_hook: { - \tag_mc_end_push: - \tag_struct_begin:n { tag=FENote,label=fn.\the\c@absfootnote } - #1 {#2} - \tag_struct_end: - \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{} + \ref_label:Vn \label@name {fnote/struct} } - { #1 {#2} } -} - - + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{Storing and retrieving reference data} +% To establish the connection between a mark and a note +% the mark has to store its representation, and the +% note has to analyse the stored representations to get +% the structure numbers of its mark. This is done +% with the public function to allow similar systems (e.g. +% tabular notes, other footnote series) to make use of this. +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\fnote_new:nn} +% This sets up a new footnote type, the first argument +% is the name, the second is meant for options. Currently +% it does nothing at all. +% It is not necessary to setup every footnote like +% command as its own type! +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_new:nn #1 #2 % #1 name, #2 options + { + \prop_new:c { g_@@_currentmarks_ #1 _prop } + } -\cs_set:Npn \@makefntext@cfgpoint #1 { - \noindent - \cs_if_exist:NT \tag_struct_begin:n { \tag_mc_end_push: } - \tag@FELbl { #1 } -} +\fnote_new:nn {default}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\fnote_mark_gput:nn} +% This commands takes as argument the representation of the mark +% (e.g. \cs{@thefnmark} and the type (typically default should work) +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_mark_gput:nn #1 #2 % #1 the representation of the mark, #2 type + { + \prop_gput:cxn { g_@@_currentmarks_ #2 _prop } + { \tag_get:n{struct_num} } + { #1 } + } -\cs_set:Npn \@makefntext@cfgpointii #1 { - \tag@FENote { #1 } - \cs_if_exist:NT \tag_struct_begin:n { \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{} } -} +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \fnote_mark_gput:nn {no,oo} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\fnote_mark_gpop:nnN} +% This commands takes as argument the representation of the mark +% (e.g. the content of\cs{@thefnmark}), the series (typically default should work) +% and a sequence into which every structure number in the property +% is stored that has the same value as the mark +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_mark_gpop:nnN #1 #2 #3 + { + \seq_clear:N #3 + \prop_set_eq:Nc \l_@@_tmpa_prop { g_@@_currentmarks_ #2 _prop } + \prop_map_inline:Nn \l_@@_tmpa_prop + { + \tl_if_eq:nnT {#1} { ##2 } + { +% \end{macrocode} +% store the key (the structure number) in the seq +% \begin{macrocode} + \seq_put_right:Nn #3 { ##1 } +% \end{macrocode} +% remove entry as used from the global prop +% \begin{macrocode} + \prop_gremove:cn { g_@@_currentmarks_ #2 _prop } {##1} + } + } + } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn\fnote_mark_gpop:nnN {ooN} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \subsubsection{Enabling tagging and links for the mark command} +% To handle the mark in the text, we define a special command +% which will surround \cs{@makefntext}. +% At this time \cs{@thefnmark} is already set. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag@FEMark #1 %#1 content + { +% \end{macrocode} +% end an open mc and start the structure. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_mc_end_push: + \tag_struct_begin:n { tag=footnotemark } +% \end{macrocode} +% The associated note is either auto detected +% or given by the user. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_autodetect_bool + { +% \end{macrocode} +% For the auto detecting we store the structure number +% and \cs{@thefnmark} inside a prop and set +% the target name of the link to the current structure number. +% TODO: this should be usable for other footnote types +% which means the name of the prop shouldn't be fix. +% \begin{macrocode} + \fnote_mark_gput:oo {\@thefnmark}{\l_fnote_type_tl} + \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_linktarget_tl {footnote*.\tag_get:n{struct_num}} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% If there is no autodetecting we need some id, +% currently it is called \cs{l__fnote_currentlabel_tl}. +% the Ref is set by looking at the label value. +% We must also add the current structure number to the \ref of the FEnote. +% Both must be delayed as we don't know if the objects of the FEnote and the mark +% have already been created. +% \begin{macrocode} + { + \hook_gput_code:nne {tagpdf/finish/before} {tagpdf/footnote} + { + \exp_not:N\fnote_gput_refs:ee + { \tag_get:n{struct_num} } + { \ref_value:Vn\l_@@_currentlabel_tl {fnote/struct} } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% in this case we set the name of the linktarget in the note +% to the structure number of the text mark. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_linktarget_tl {footnote*.\ref_value:Vn\l_@@_currentlabel_tl {fnote/struct}} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% And now the actual content +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_mc_begin:n{tag=Lbl} + % + \bool_if:NTF \l_fnote_link_bool + { + \exp_args:No + \hyper@linkstart + { \l_fnote_link_type_tl } + { \l_@@_linktarget_tl } + #1 + \hyper@linkend + } + { #1 } + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_end: + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% At last set the kernel command to this one +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set_eq:NN \@kernel@process@makefnmark \tag@FEMark +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsubsection{The footnote text} -\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag@FELbl #1 { - \tag_if_loaded:TF - { - % target should perhaps be raised ... - \IfPackageLoadedTF{hyperref}{ \hypertarget{fn.\the\c@absfootnote}{} }{} - %\tag_struct_begin:n { tag=FENote,label=fn.\the\c@absfootnote } %alternativ location for structure - \tag_struct_begin:n { tag=Lbl } - \tag_mc_begin:n { tag=Lbl } - #1 - \tag_mc_end: - \tag_struct_end: - } - { #1 } -} +% We need a public command to append values to the Ref keys +% \begin{macro}{\@@_gput_ref:nn,\fnote_gput_refs:nn,\fnote_gput_refs:ee} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_gput_ref:nn #1 #2 %#1 the structure number receiving the ref #2 + { + \tag_if_active:T + { + \tag_struct_gput:nne {#1}{ref}{\tag_struct_object_ref:e { #2 }} + } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_gput_refs:nn #1 #2 % pair of numbers + { + \@@_gput_ref:nn {#1}{#2} + \@@_gput_ref:nn {#2}{#1} + } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \fnote_gput_refs:nn {ee} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_dflt_struct_tl +\tl_set:Nn \l_@@_dflt_struct_tl {1} +% \end{macrocode} +% kernel hook for tagging (2 args) +% this sets the structure around the whole text +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag@FENote #1#2 % #1 config point, \insert\footins #2 content + { + \tag_mc_end_push: +% \end{macrocode} +% test if a footnote is allowed, if not move up to the document structure. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_check_child:nnTF {FENote}{pdf2} + { + \tag_struct_begin:n { tag=footnote } + } + { + \tag_struct_begin:n { tag=footnote,parent=\l_@@_dflt_struct_tl } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Store the current structure number for labels. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_currentstruct_tl { \tag_get:n{struct_num} } +% \end{macrocode} +% We want to move the label structure here. So we provide a container +% It number is |\l__fnote_currentstruct_tl| plus 1. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_struct_begin:n { tag=footnotelabel }\tag_struct_end: +% \end{macrocode} +% after we have opened the structure we can use the structure number to +% try to detect the connected marks. As with the marks we assume that sometimes +% no auto detection is done. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_autodetect_bool + { +% \end{macrocode} +% find open marks with identical \cs{@thefnmark} +% \begin{macrocode} + \fnote_mark_gpop:ooN { \@thefnmark }{ \l_fnote_type_tl } \l_@@_currentrefs_seq +% \end{macrocode} +% Then we store the object numbers of the marks in the /Ref of the FENote structure: +% and the number of the FEnote into the marks structure: +% \begin{macrocode} + \seq_map_inline:Nn \l_@@_currentrefs_seq + { + \fnote_gput_refs:ee {##1}{ \l_@@_currentstruct_tl } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% If no auto detection is done +% \begin{NOTE}{UF} +% TODO: decide what to do here: some label in the optional argument? +% or refer to \cs{footref} +% \end{NOTE} +% \begin{macrocode} + {%no auto -\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag@FENote #1 { - \tag_if_loaded:TF - { - \tag_mc_begin:n{tag=FENote} - #1 + } +% \end{macrocode} +% This finish the setup of the tagging structure. +% Now we process the text. The destinations for the links are set with the label +% so that we can be sure that we are in hmode. +% \begin{macrocode} + #1 {#2} + \tag_struct_end: + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% At last set the kernel command to this one +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set_eq:NN \@kernel@process@footnotetext \tag@FENote +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{@makefntext@cfgpoint} is the configuration point responsible for +% typesetting the mark in the note. We use it to surround +% the mark with the needed tagging commands. +% +% TODO check if this should/can be kernel configuration points +% or if an additional kernel configuration points are needed. +% If yes, what about the paragraph start and the paratagging?? +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set_protected:Npn \@makefntext@cfgpoint #1 %#1 code that typesets the mark. + { + \noindent + \tag_mc_end_push: + \tag@FENoteLbl { #1 } + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \cs{tag@FENoteLbl} creates the label in the note on the bottom. +% It also adds link targets for the hyperlinking. +% +% \begin{macro}{\tag@FENoteLbl} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag@FENoteLbl #1 + { +% \end{macrocode} +% We create a link target for every related mark. The name is footnote* + structure number +% of the mark. We also add a link target for the current structure (for footref) +% \begin{macrocode} + %\seq_show:N\l_@@_currentrefs_seq + \seq_map_inline:Nn\l_@@_currentrefs_seq {\MakeLinkTarget*{footnote*.##1}} + \MakeLinkTarget*{footnote*.\l_@@_currentstruct_tl} +% \end{macrocode} +% now we add the tagging commands. We move the structure of the label to +% to the container at the begin of the note. +% \begin{NOTE}{UF} +% check if the NonStruct is really needed. Perhaps we can simply move the mc. +% \end{NOTE} +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_struct_begin:n { tag=NonStruct,parent=\l_@@_currentstruct_tl +1 } + \tag_mc_begin:n { tag=Lbl } + #1 \tag_mc_end: - %\tag_struct_end: %alternative location for structure end but ends inside a P - } - { #1 } -} - + \tag_struct_end: + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \cs{@makefntext@cfgpointii} is the +% configuration point around the actual note text. +% +% TODO check if this should/can be kernel configuration points +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set_protected:Npn \@makefntext@cfgpointii #1 + { + \tag_mc_end_push: + \tag@FENotetext { #1 } + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\tag@FENotetext} +% +% This command currently only adds an MC chunk, +% +% TODO Should it set a mc or could it rely on the content? +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag@FENotetext #1 + { + \tag_mc_begin:n{} + #1 + \tag_mc_end: + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} %------------------------------------- - +% \begin{macrocode} \ExplSyntaxOff %</kernel> % \end{macrocode} -% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<@@=> +% \end{macrocode} % % \section{Reimplementing the \pkg{footmisc} package} % @@ -1571,7 +2296,10 @@ \ifFN@multiplefootnote \providecommand*{\multiplefootnotemarker}{3sp} - \providecommand*{\multfootsep}{,} +% we tag the separator as artifact + \ExplSyntaxOn + \providecommand*{\multfootsep}{\tag_mc_end_push:\tag_mc_begin:n{artifact},\tag_mc_end:\tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}} + \ExplSyntaxOff \AddToHook{fnmark} {\FN@mf@check} \AddToHook{fnmark/end} {\FN@mf@prepare} % diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-graphic.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-graphic.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f9457e0524f --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-graphic.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,1073 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-graphic.dtx (C) Copyright 2022-2023 LaTeX Project +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% +% The development version of the bundle can be found below +% +% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab +% +% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue. +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-graphic.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% +% +% \title{The \textsf{latex-lab-graphic} package\\ +% Tagging of included graphics } +% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial implementation done by Ulrike Fischer}} +% \date{v0.8 2023-04-07} +% +% \maketitle +% +% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}} +% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}} +% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class +% customizations}} +% +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% \begin{documentation} +% \begin{abstract} +% The following code implements a first draft for the tagging of graphics +% included with \cs{includegraphics}. +% \end{abstract} +% +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% The code here handle the tagging of pictures included with \cs{includegraphics} +% and the picture environment. Pictures drawn with \texttt{l3draw} or \texttt{tikz} +% or similar packages aren't handled yet. +% +% Tagging of graphics included with \cs{includegraphics} is at a first glance trivial: +% They are either only decorations, in which case they should be in a \texttt{artifact} +% MC-chunk or (in pdf 2.0) tagged as an \texttt{Artifact} structure, +% or they are meaningful and then they should be tagged as a \texttt{Figure}. +% Such a graphic is a simple box and no other content can interfere so adding the +% structure commands shouldn't pose much problems. +% +% But things are actually not so easy. +% +% At first there are two ways to add a graphic +% to a structure: similar to text as a marked content item (by surrounding +% it with \cs{tagmcbegin} and \cs{tagmcend}) or by referencing the XObject +% with an OBJR object (similar to a link annotation). Which method is more sensible +% (and if it actually matters) is unknown but should be tested. +% Currently the first method is used as the second require changes in the backend files. +% +% +% At second---and this is actually a \emph{much} larger problem---a +% \texttt{Figure} structure should have an attribute with an \texttt{BBox} entry. +% The value of a \texttt{BBox} is an array of four numbers that gives the +% coordinates of the left, bottom, right, and top edges +% of the structure element’s bounding box. That is the rectangle that completely encloses +% its \emph{visible} content so not necessarly the TeX bounding box: +% if \texttt{viewport} or \texttt{trim} is used and the +% graphic is not clipped, the visible content can be larger. +% +% Getting the \texttt{BBox} is quite straightforward for a graphic that is +% used once as is. But graphics can be trimmed, scaled, reflected, rotated and reused +% in various ways. This transformations typically involve a mix of \TeX{} commands +% like shifting a box or changing the bounding box and backend commands like +% inserting a pdfliteral with a transformation matrix and +% and not in all cases getting the \texttt{BBox} is possible +% without rewriting large parts of the graphics/x packages. Problematic are +% \begin{itemize} +% \item manipulations through external box commands +% (\cs{rotatebox}, \cs{reflectbox}, \cs{scalebox}). The current implementation +% in the graphics/x packages do not pass the transformation matrix in way +% that allows to track the changes for the \texttt{BBox} +% of an included graphic: sometimes +% the values are set to late (after the box is already stored), and often the +% values are not grouped and can leak out from earlier uses of the commands. +% +% \item some combination of keys in the optional argument of \cs{includegraphics}. +% Examples are \texttt{origin} and multiple calls to \texttt{scale} +% and \texttt{angle}) as they internally call the box commands. +% Examples of failing combinations can be found in the test file +% \texttt{graphic-faults}. +% +% \item graphics that are stored in a box and reused: to get the \texttt{BBox} +% one has to set a label that stores the position with \cs{pdfsavepos}, +% and if a box is reused one gets multiply defined labels. +% One possible solution here is to make +% use of the new delayed \cs{pdfliteral}. It allows to change the label names +% in the shipout, but this requires careful tracking the box usages +% and so various kernel changes. +% \end{itemize} +% +% +% +% \section{Restrictions and Todos} +% Correct tagging is currently +% implemented only for simple \cs{includegraphics} and the keys +% \texttt{viewport}, \texttt{trim}, +% \texttt{scale} and \texttt{angle} (used at most once). +% +% Not supported +% \begin{itemize} +% \item graphics inside \cs{rotatebox}, \cs{reflectbox}, \cs{scalebox}. +% +% TODO: A new implementation with \texttt{l3graphics} and \texttt{l3box} is +% probably needed here. +% +% \item multiple uses of the \texttt{scale} and \texttt{angle} keys +% +% \item multiple use of graphics stored in boxes. For such graphics automated tagging +% should be probably deactivated when storing the content +% and tagging should be added around the \cs{usebox}. (How to +% proceed when content is saved in boxes needs generally more testing). +% \end{itemize} +% +% +% \section{Additional keys} +% The code defines additional keys for \cs{includegraphics}: +% +% \begin{description} +% \item[\texttt{tag}] with the values +% \begin{description} +% \item[\texttt{artifact}] When used the graphic will be tagged as artifact. This doesn't +% require a \texttt{BBox} and so works also in some of the not yet supported cases described +% above. +% \item[\texttt{false}] When used tagging will be stopped completly. It is then the +% responsability of the surrounding code to add appropriate tagging commands. +% \item[\meta{name}] Other values will be used as tag names in the structure. If the tag is not +% known as a structure tag you will get an warning from tagpdf. The default name is currently +% \texttt{Figure} +% \end{description} +% \item[\texttt{actualtext}] This allows to add an /ActualText to the structure. +% This is useful for small graphics that represent single chars or a short word like a +% logo. If \texttt{actualtext} is used, the graphics is not enclosed in \texttt{Figure} +% structure but in a \texttt{Span} structure and no \texttt{/BBox} attribute is added. +% This in accordance with (the draft of) PDF/UA-2 but violates perhaps PDF/UA-1. +% \item[\texttt{correct-BBox}] If the calculated \texttt{/BBox} values are wrong +% they can be correct with this key. It expects four dimensions that are added to the +% \texttt{/BBox} values. +% \item[\texttt{debug}] The value \texttt{BBox} will show the calculated \texttt{/BBox} +% as a half transparent red rectangle. +% \end{description} +% +% The code also redefines the \texttt{alt} key to actually add its values +% as an alternative text. If no \texttt{alt} value is given, a warning is issued +% and the file name of the graphic is used. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<@@=tag> +%<*package> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{documentation} +% \begin{implementation} +% \section{Implementation} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesExplPackage {latex-lab-testphase-graphic} {2023-04-07} {0.8} + {Code related to the tagging of graphics} +% \end{macrocode} +% We load l3opacity for the debug code +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{l3opacity} +% \end{macrocode} +% +%\subsection{Saving the position} +% We need a replacement for zref-savepos. This uses l3ref which loaded +% by the pdfmanagement/tagpdf. +% +% TODO: this is perhaps needed in other places too and should be moved to +% l3ref!! +% \begin{macrocode} +\ref_attribute_gset:nnnn{xpos}{0}{shipout}{\int_use:N\tex_lastxpos:D} +\ref_attribute_gset:nnnn{ypos}{0}{shipout}{\int_use:N\tex_lastypos:D} +% \end{macrocode} + +% \begin{macro}{\@@_graphic_savepos:n} +% this is the command which stores the position. It uses +% two savepos in case bidi needs it (see zref-savepos). +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn\@@_graphic_savepos:n #1 + { + \tex_savepos:D + \ref_label:nn{#1}{xpos,ypos,abspage} + \tex_savepos:D + } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_graphic_savepos:n {e} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Variables} +% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_graphic_debug_bool} +% A boolean for debug code +% \begin{macrocode} +\bool_new:N \l_@@_graphic_debug_bool +\keys_define:nn { document / metadata } + { + debug / BBox .code:n = { \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_graphic_debug_bool } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% \begin{variable}{\g_@@_graphic_int} +% This is used to get unique labels in the savepos code. +% \begin{macrocode} +\int_new:N\g_@@_graphic_int +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} + +% \begin{variable} +% { +% \g_@@_graphic_lx_tl, +% \g_@@_graphic_ly_tl, +% \g_@@_graphic_ux_tl, +% \g_@@_graphic_uy_tl, +% \l_@@_graphic_bboxcorr_seq +% \l_@@_graphic_bboxcorr_bool +% } +% This commands will hold the calculated BBox values. Local variables +% would probably work too, but global variables can be easier retrieved +% in tests and debugging code ... +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \g_@@_graphic_lx_tl +\tl_new:N \g_@@_graphic_ly_tl +\tl_new:N \g_@@_graphic_ux_tl +\tl_new:N \g_@@_graphic_uy_tl +\seq_new:N\l_@@_graphic_bboxcorr_seq +\bool_new:N\l_@@_graphic_bboxcorr_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_graphic_currentlabel_tl} +% This holds the label name of the savepos. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_graphic_currentlabel_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} + +% \begin{variable} +% { +% \l_@@_graphic_alt_tl, +% \l_@@_graphic_alt_dft_tl, +% \l_@@_graphic_actual_tl, +% \l_@@_graphic_struct_tl, +% \l_@@_graphic_artifact_bool, +% \l_@@_graphic_BBox_bool +% } +% Variables for the alt text, the actualtext and the structure tag. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_graphic_alt_tl +\tl_new:N \l_@@_graphic_alt_dflt_tl +\tl_set:Nn \l_@@_graphic_alt_dflt_tl {\Gin@base\Gin@ext} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_graphic_actual_tl +\tl_new:N \l_@@_graphic_struct_tl +\tl_set:Nn\l_@@_graphic_struct_tl {Figure} +\bool_new:N\l_@@_graphic_artifact_bool +\bool_new:N\l_@@_graphic_BBox_bool +\bool_set_true:N\l_@@_graphic_BBox_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} + +% \begin{variable} +% { +% \l_@@_graphic_sin_fp +% ,\l_@@_graphic_cos_fp +% ,\l_@@_graphic_scale_fp +% ,\l_@@_graphic_lxly_fp +% ,\l_@@_graphic_lxuy_fp +% ,\l_@@_graphic_uxly_fp +% ,\l_@@_graphic_uxuy_fp +% ,\l_@@_graphic_ux_fp +% ,\l_@@_graphic_ly_fp +% ,\l_@@_graphic_lx_fp +% ,\l_@@_graphic_uy_fp +% ,\l_@@_graphic_trim_ux_fp +% ,\l_@@_graphic_trim_ly_fp +% ,\l_@@_graphic_trim_lx_fp +% ,\l_@@_graphic_trim_uy_fp +% } +% A bunch of fp-variables (we don't use tl-vars, +% to avoid to have to take care about minus signs everwhere) +% \begin{macrocode} +\fp_new:N\l_@@_graphic_sin_fp +\fp_new:N\l_@@_graphic_cos_fp +\fp_new:N\l_@@_graphic_lxly_fp +\fp_new:N\l_@@_graphic_lxuy_fp +\fp_new:N\l_@@_graphic_uxly_fp +\fp_new:N\l_@@_graphic_uxuy_fp +\fp_new:N\l_@@_graphic_ux_fp +\fp_new:N\l_@@_graphic_ly_fp +\fp_new:N\l_@@_graphic_lx_fp +\fp_new:N\l_@@_graphic_uy_fp +% \end{macrocode} +% this holds the scale value. Currently this only the one from +% \cs{Gin@scalex} +% \begin{macrocode} +\fp_new:N\l_@@_graphic_scale_fp +% \end{macrocode} +% the follow variables hold the four trim values (or the equivalent calculated +% values if viewport is used. +% \begin{macrocode} +\fp_new:N\l_@@_graphic_trim_ux_fp +\fp_new:N\l_@@_graphic_trim_ly_fp +\fp_new:N\l_@@_graphic_trim_lx_fp +\fp_new:N\l_@@_graphic_trim_uy_fp +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +%\subsection{Tagging commands} +% +% \begin{macro}{\Gin@tag@struct@begin} +% The command to start the tagging. +% \begin{macrocode} +\msg_new:nnn {tag}{alt-text-missing} + { + Alternative~text~for~graphic~is~missing.\\ + Using~'#1'~instead + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn\Gin@tag@struct@begin + { + \tag_if_active:T + { + \tag_mc_end_push: +% \end{macrocode} +% we don't open a structure for artifacts to make it easier to use +% graphics in saveboxes. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bool_if:NTF\l_@@_graphic_artifact_bool + { + \tag_mc_begin:n{artifact} + } + { + \tl_if_empty:NTF\l_@@_graphic_actual_tl + { + \tl_if_empty:NT\l_@@_graphic_alt_tl + { + \msg_warning:nnx{tag}{alt-text-missing}{\l_@@_graphic_alt_dflt_tl} + \tl_set:Nx\l_@@_graphic_alt_tl {\l_@@_graphic_alt_dflt_tl} + } + \tag_struct_begin:n + { + tag=\l_@@_graphic_struct_tl, + alt=\l_@@_graphic_alt_tl, + } + } + { + \tag_struct_begin:n + { + tag=Span, + actualtext=\l_@@_graphic_actual_tl, + } + \bool_set_false:N\l_@@_graphic_BBox_bool + } + \tag_mc_begin:n{} + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} + +% \begin{macro}{\Gin@tag@struct@end} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn\Gin@tag@struct@end + { + \tag_if_active:T + { + \tag_mc_end: + \bool_if:NF\l_@@_graphic_artifact_bool + { + \tag_struct_end: + } + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{} + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Patching graphics commands} +% All changes are currently done in \cs{Gin@setfile}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{package/graphics/after} + { + \def\Gin@setfile#1#2#3{% + \ifx\\#2\\\Gread@false\fi + \ifGin@bbox\else + \ifGread@ + \csname Gread@% + \expandafter\ifx\csname Gread@#1\endcsname\relax + eps% + \else + #1% + \fi + \endcsname{\Gin@base#2}% + \else + \Gin@nosize{#3}% + \fi + \fi + \Gin@viewport@code + \Gin@nat@height\Gin@ury bp% + \advance\Gin@nat@height-\Gin@lly bp% + \Gin@nat@width\Gin@urx bp% + \advance\Gin@nat@width-\Gin@llx bp% + \Gin@req@sizes + \expandafter\ifx\csname Ginclude@#1\endcsname\relax + \Gin@drafttrue + \expandafter\ifx\csname Gread@#1\endcsname\relax + \@latex@error{Can not include graphics of type: #1}\@ehc + \global\expandafter\let\csname Gread@#1\endcsname\@empty + \fi + \fi + \leavevmode +% \end{macrocode} +% Here the tagging begins. We want to catch also the draft box, +% and for luatex tagging must be started before the \cs{setbox}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \Gin@tag@struct@begin %NEW + \ifGin@draft + \hb@xt@\Gin@req@width{% + \vrule\hss + \vbox to \Gin@req@height{% + \hrule \@width \Gin@req@width + \vss + \edef\@tempa{#3}% + \rlap{ \ttfamily\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\@tempa}% + \vss + \hrule}% + \hss\vrule}% + \else + \@addtofilelist{#3}% + \ProvidesFile{#3}[Graphic file (type #1)]% + \setbox\z@\hbox{\csname Ginclude@#1\endcsname{#3}}% + \dp\z@\z@ + \ht\z@\Gin@req@height + \wd\z@\Gin@req@width +% \end{macrocode} +% This the main command to calculate the BBox values. +% \begin{macrocode} + \Gin@tag@bbox@attribute %new + \box\z@ +% \end{macrocode} +% and here the tagging stops. +% \begin{macrocode} + \Gin@tag@struct@end %new + \fi} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Additional keys for the graphics command} +% TODO: this is a bit temporary and will perhaps need more refinement. +% we also ensure that graphicx is loaded for the keyval support. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{package/graphicx/after}[latex-lab] + { + \define@key{Gin}{alt} {\tl_set:Nx\l_@@_graphic_alt_tl{\text_purify:n{#1}}} + \define@key{Gin}{artifact}[] + { + \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_graphic_artifact_bool + \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_graphic_BBox_bool + } + \define@key{Gin}{actualtext} + { + \tl_set:Nx\l_@@_graphic_actual_tl{\text_purify:n{#1}} + \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_graphic_BBox_bool + } + \define@key{Gin}{correct-BBox} + { + \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_graphic_bboxcorr_bool + \seq_set_split:Nnn\l_@@_graphic_bboxcorr_seq{~}{#1~0pt~0pt~0pt~0pt} + } + \define@key{Gin}{tag} + { + \str_case:nnF {#1} + { + {artifact} + { + \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_graphic_artifact_bool + \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_graphic_BBox_bool + } + {false}{\tag_stop:} + } + {\tl_set:Nn\l_@@_graphic_struct_tl{#1}} + } + } +\AddToHook{package/graphics/after}[latex-lab] + {\RequirePackage{graphicx}} +% \end{macrocode} +% For picture and other environments we need a similar set of keys. +% TODO: redefine \cs{includegraphics} to make use of these here?? +% \begin{macrocode} +\keys_define:nn{tag/picture} + { + ,alt .code:n = + {\tl_set:Nx\l_@@_graphic_alt_tl{\text_purify:n{#1}}} + ,artifact .code:n = + { + \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_graphic_artifact_bool + \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_graphic_BBox_bool + } + ,actualtext .code:n = + { + \tl_set:Nx\l_@@_graphic_actual_tl{\text_purify:n{#1}} + \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_graphic_BBox_bool + } + ,correct-BBox .code:n = + { + \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_graphic_bboxcorr_bool + \seq_set_split:Nnn\l_@@_graphic_bboxcorr_seq{~}{#1~0pt~0pt~0pt~0pt} + } + ,tag .code:n = + { + \str_case:nnF {#1} + { + {artifact} + { + \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_graphic_artifact_bool + \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_graphic_BBox_bool + } + {false}{\tag_stop:} + } + {\tl_set:Nn\l_@@_graphic_struct_tl{#1}} + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Calculating the BBox} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_graphic_get_trim:} +% Graphics can be trimmed with the trim and the viewport key. +% If the graphic is not clipped the values must be taken into +% account when rotating. +% If viewport is used we have to calculate the trim. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_graphic_get_trim: + { + \legacy_if:nTF {Gin@clip} +% \end{macrocode} +% Setting to 0 is not strictly needed but looks cleaner. +% \begin{macrocode} + { + \fp_zero:N\l_@@_graphic_trim_lx_fp + \fp_zero:N\l_@@_graphic_trim_ly_fp + \fp_zero:N\l_@@_graphic_trim_ux_fp + \fp_zero:N\l_@@_graphic_trim_uy_fp + } + { + \fp_set:Nn \l_@@_graphic_trim_lx_fp {\l_@@_graphic_scale_fp*\Gin@vllx} + \fp_set:Nn \l_@@_graphic_trim_ly_fp {\l_@@_graphic_scale_fp*\Gin@vlly} + \fp_set:Nn \l_@@_graphic_trim_ux_fp {\l_@@_graphic_scale_fp*\Gin@vurx} + \fp_set:Nn \l_@@_graphic_trim_uy_fp {\l_@@_graphic_scale_fp*\Gin@vury} + \cs_if_exist:NT \Gin@ollx + { + \fp_set:Nn \l_@@_graphic_trim_ux_fp {\l_@@_graphic_scale_fp* (\Gin@ourx-(\Gin@urx)) } + \fp_set:Nn \l_@@_graphic_trim_uy_fp {\l_@@_graphic_scale_fp* (\Gin@oury-(\Gin@ury)) } + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_graphic_get_scale:} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_graphic_get_scale: + { + \fp_set:Nn \l_@@_graphic_scale_fp { \Gin@scalex } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_graphic_applyangle:nnnn} +% This takes the current BBox and rotates it according to the use angle. +% This is the most laborious code, as we have to take also the trim values into +% account. We have to compare the values after the rotation to find the right corners +% for the BBox. Not sure, if this is the most effective code, +% the l3draw package has similar code to calculate a rotation, +% this can perhaps be reused ... +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_graphic_applyangle:nnnn #1#2#3#4 %lx,ly,ux,uy + { + \bool_lazy_and:nnT + {\cs_if_exist_p:N \Grot@angle } + {! \int_compare_p:nNn { \Grot@angle }={0}} + { + \fp_set:Nn \l_@@_graphic_sin_fp { sind(\Grot@angle) } + \fp_set:Nn \l_@@_graphic_cos_fp { cosd(\Grot@angle) } + \fp_set:Nn \l_@@_graphic_lx_fp {#1} + \fp_set:Nn \l_@@_graphic_ly_fp {#2} + \fp_set:Nn \l_@@_graphic_ux_fp {#3} + \fp_set:Nn \l_@@_graphic_uy_fp {#4} +% \end{macrocode} +% get the x coordinates (cos,-sin) +% \begin{macrocode} + \fp_set:Nn\l_@@_graphic_lxly_fp + { + -\l_@@_graphic_trim_lx_fp * \l_@@_graphic_cos_fp + +\l_@@_graphic_trim_ly_fp * \l_@@_graphic_sin_fp + } + \fp_set:Nn\l_@@_graphic_lxuy_fp + { + (-\l_@@_graphic_trim_lx_fp) * \l_@@_graphic_cos_fp + + + (\l_@@_graphic_uy_fp-\l_@@_graphic_ly_fp-\l_@@_graphic_trim_ly_fp) + * (-\l_@@_graphic_sin_fp) + } + \fp_set:Nn\l_@@_graphic_uxly_fp + { + (\l_@@_graphic_ux_fp-\l_@@_graphic_lx_fp-\l_@@_graphic_trim_lx_fp) + * \l_@@_graphic_cos_fp + + + (\l_@@_graphic_trim_ly_fp) * (\l_@@_graphic_sin_fp) + } + \fp_set:Nn\l_@@_graphic_uxuy_fp + { + (\l_@@_graphic_ux_fp-\l_@@_graphic_lx_fp-\l_@@_graphic_trim_lx_fp) + * \l_@@_graphic_cos_fp + + + (\l_@@_graphic_uy_fp-\l_@@_graphic_ly_fp-\l_@@_graphic_trim_ly_fp) + * (-\l_@@_graphic_sin_fp) + } + \tl_gset:Nx\g_@@_graphic_lx_tl + { + \fp_eval:n + { + min + ( + \l_@@_graphic_lxly_fp, + \l_@@_graphic_lxuy_fp, + \l_@@_graphic_uxly_fp, + \l_@@_graphic_uxuy_fp, + ) + +\l_@@_graphic_lx_fp + +\l_@@_graphic_trim_lx_fp + } + } + \tl_gset:Nx\g_@@_graphic_ux_tl + { + \fp_eval:n + { + max + ( + \l_@@_graphic_lxly_fp, + \l_@@_graphic_lxuy_fp, + \l_@@_graphic_uxly_fp, + \l_@@_graphic_uxuy_fp + ) + +\l_@@_graphic_lx_fp + +\l_@@_graphic_trim_lx_fp + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% get the y coordinates (sin,cos) +% \begin{macrocode} + \fp_set:Nn\l_@@_graphic_lxly_fp + { + -\l_@@_graphic_trim_lx_fp * \l_@@_graphic_sin_fp + -\l_@@_graphic_trim_ly_fp * \l_@@_graphic_cos_fp + } + \fp_set:Nn\l_@@_graphic_lxuy_fp + { + - \l_@@_graphic_trim_lx_fp * \l_@@_graphic_sin_fp + + + (\l_@@_graphic_uy_fp-\l_@@_graphic_ly_fp-\l_@@_graphic_trim_ly_fp) + * \l_@@_graphic_cos_fp + } + \fp_set:Nn\l_@@_graphic_uxly_fp + { + (\l_@@_graphic_ux_fp-\l_@@_graphic_lx_fp-\l_@@_graphic_trim_lx_fp) + * \l_@@_graphic_sin_fp + - \l_@@_graphic_trim_ly_fp * \l_@@_graphic_cos_fp + } + \fp_set:Nn\l_@@_graphic_uxuy_fp + { + (\l_@@_graphic_ux_fp-\l_@@_graphic_lx_fp-\l_@@_graphic_trim_lx_fp) + * \l_@@_graphic_sin_fp + + + (\l_@@_graphic_uy_fp-\l_@@_graphic_ly_fp-\l_@@_graphic_trim_ly_fp) + * \l_@@_graphic_cos_fp + } + \tl_gset:Nx\g_@@_graphic_ly_tl + { + \fp_eval:n + { + min + ( + \l_@@_graphic_lxly_fp, + \l_@@_graphic_lxuy_fp, + \l_@@_graphic_uxly_fp, + \l_@@_graphic_uxuy_fp + ) + + \l_@@_graphic_ly_fp + \l_@@_graphic_trim_ly_fp + } + } + \tl_gset:Nx\g_@@_graphic_uy_tl + { + \fp_eval:n + { + max + ( + \l_@@_graphic_lxly_fp, + \l_@@_graphic_lxuy_fp, + \l_@@_graphic_uxly_fp, + \l_@@_graphic_uxuy_fp, + ) + + \l_@@_graphic_ly_fp + \l_@@_graphic_trim_ly_fp + } + } + } + } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn\@@_graphic_applyangle:nnnn {VVVV} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_graphic_applycorr:NNNN} +% This command is used to add at the end the correction values. Quite dump ... +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_graphic_applycorr:NNNN #1 #2 #3 #4 + { + \bool_if:NT\l_@@_graphic_bboxcorr_bool + { + \tl_set:Nx #1 + { + \fp_eval:n + { + #1 + + + \dim_to_decimal_in_bp:n {\seq_item:Nn \l_@@_graphic_bboxcorr_seq {1} } + } + } + \tl_set:Nx #2 + { + \fp_eval:n + { + #2 + + + \dim_to_decimal_in_bp:n {\seq_item:Nn \l_@@_graphic_bboxcorr_seq {2} } + } + } + \tl_set:Nx #3 + { + \fp_eval:n + { + #3 + + + \dim_to_decimal_in_bp:n {\seq_item:Nn \l_@@_graphic_bboxcorr_seq {3} } + } + } + \tl_set:Nx #4 + { + \fp_eval:n + { + #4 + + + \dim_to_decimal_in_bp:n {\seq_item:Nn \l_@@_graphic_bboxcorr_seq {4} } + } + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\Gin@tag@bbox@attribute} +% This is the main command to calculate and set the Bbox attribute +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \Gin@tag@bbox@attribute + { +% \end{macrocode} +% the attribute is only needed if tagging is active and there is not artifact. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bool_lazy_all:nT + { + {\tag_if_active_p:} + {!\l_@@_graphic_artifact_bool} + {\l_@@_graphic_BBox_bool} + } + { + \fp_set:Nn \l_@@_graphic_scale_fp { \Gin@scalex } + \@@_graphic_get_trim: + \int_gincr:N\g_@@_graphic_int + \tl_set:Nx\l_@@_graphic_currentlabel_tl {_@@_graphic_\int_use:N \g_@@_graphic_int} + \@@_graphic_savepos:e { \l_@@_graphic_currentlabel_tl } + \tl_gset:Nx\g_@@_graphic_lx_tl + { + \dim_to_decimal_in_bp:n + { \@@_ref_value:enn {\l_@@_graphic_currentlabel_tl}{xpos}{0}sp } + } + \tl_gset:Nx\g_@@_graphic_ly_tl + { + \dim_to_decimal_in_bp:n + { \@@_ref_value:enn {\l_@@_graphic_currentlabel_tl}{ypos}{0}sp } + } + \tl_gset:Nx\g_@@_graphic_ux_tl + { + \fp_eval:n + { + \g_@@_graphic_lx_tl + + + \dim_to_decimal_in_bp:n { \Gin@req@width } + } + } + \tl_gset:Nx\g_@@_graphic_uy_tl + { + \fp_eval:n + { + \g_@@_graphic_ly_tl + + + \dim_to_decimal_in_bp:n { \Gin@req@height } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% If the graphics is not clipped we must add the trim values. +% \begin{macrocode} + \legacy_if:nF {Gin@clip} + { + \tl_gset:Nx\g_@@_graphic_ux_tl + { + \fp_eval:n + { + \g_@@_graphic_ux_tl + + + \l_@@_graphic_trim_ux_fp + } + } + \tl_gset:Nx\g_@@_graphic_lx_tl + { + \fp_eval:n + { + \g_@@_graphic_lx_tl + - + \l_@@_graphic_trim_lx_fp + } + } + \tl_gset:Nx\g_@@_graphic_uy_tl + { + \fp_eval:n + { + \g_@@_graphic_uy_tl + + + \l_@@_graphic_trim_uy_fp + } + } + \tl_gset:Nx\g_@@_graphic_ly_tl + { + \fp_eval:n + { + \g_@@_graphic_ly_tl + - + \l_@@_graphic_trim_ly_fp + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% If there is an angle we now rotate the values. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_graphic_applyangle:VVVV + \g_@@_graphic_lx_tl + \g_@@_graphic_ly_tl + \g_@@_graphic_ux_tl + \g_@@_graphic_uy_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% At last we have to add the correction values +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_graphic_applycorr:NNNN + \g_@@_graphic_lx_tl + \g_@@_graphic_ly_tl + \g_@@_graphic_ux_tl + \g_@@_graphic_uy_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} + \bool_if:NT\l_@@_graphic_debug_bool + { + \@@_graphic_show_bbox:VVVVne + \g_@@_graphic_lx_tl + \g_@@_graphic_ly_tl + \g_@@_graphic_ux_tl + \g_@@_graphic_uy_tl + {red} + {\int_use:N\g_@@_graphic_int} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Now we add the attribute. We do it manually as it had to be delayed until now. +% The structure and the mc must be open earlier, before the \cs{setbox} (at least +% for luatex it has to). TODO: think about interface if more attributes are needed. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_prop_gput:cnx + { g_@@_struct_\int_eval:n {\c@g_@@_struct_abs_int}_prop } + { A } + { + << + /O /Layout /BBox~ + [ + \g_@@_graphic_lx_tl\c_space_tl + \g_@@_graphic_ly_tl\c_space_tl + \g_@@_graphic_ux_tl\c_space_tl + \g_@@_graphic_uy_tl + ] + >> + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \subsection{Support for the picture environment} +% +% \begin{macro}{\picture@tag@bbox@attribute} +% Picture needs a similar command to calculate the bbox. But here we stay simple +% and use simply the size of the picbox. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\picture@tag@bbox@attribute + { + \bool_lazy_all:nT + { + {\tag_if_active_p:} + {!\l_@@_graphic_artifact_bool} + {\l_@@_graphic_BBox_bool} + } + { + \int_gincr:N\g_@@_graphic_int + \tl_set:Nx\l_@@_graphic_currentlabel_tl {_@@_graphic_\int_use:N \g_@@_graphic_int} + \@@_graphic_savepos:e { \l_@@_graphic_currentlabel_tl } + \tl_gset:Nx \g_@@_graphic_lx_tl + { + \dim_to_decimal_in_bp:n + { \@@_ref_value:enn {\l_@@_graphic_currentlabel_tl}{xpos}{0}sp } + } + \tl_gset:Nx \g_@@_graphic_ly_tl + { + \dim_to_decimal_in_bp:n + { \@@_ref_value:enn {\l_@@_graphic_currentlabel_tl}{ypos}{0}sp - \dp\@picbox } + } + \tl_gset:Nx \g_@@_graphic_ux_tl + { + \dim_to_decimal_in_bp:n + { + \g_@@_graphic_lx_tl bp + \wd\@picbox + } + } + \tl_gset:Nx \g_@@_graphic_uy_tl + { + \dim_to_decimal_in_bp:n + { + \g_@@_graphic_ly_tl bp + \ht\@picbox + \dp\@picbox + } + } + \@@_graphic_applycorr:NNNN + \g_@@_graphic_lx_tl + \g_@@_graphic_ly_tl + \g_@@_graphic_ux_tl + \g_@@_graphic_uy_tl + \bool_if:NT\l_@@_graphic_debug_bool + { + \@@_graphic_show_bbox:VVVVne + \g_@@_graphic_lx_tl + \g_@@_graphic_ly_tl + \g_@@_graphic_ux_tl + \g_@@_graphic_uy_tl + {red} + {\int_use:N\g_@@_graphic_int} + } + \@@_prop_gput:cnx + { g_@@_struct_\int_eval:n {\c@g_@@_struct_abs_int}_prop } + { A } + { + << + /O /Layout /BBox~ + [ + \g_@@_graphic_lx_tl\c_space_tl + \g_@@_graphic_ly_tl\c_space_tl + \g_@@_graphic_ux_tl\c_space_tl + \g_@@_graphic_uy_tl + ] + >> + } + } + } + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% We redefine \cs{picture} to accept an optional argument and +% change the default alt text. We also ensure that we are in +% hmode, so that stopping tagging doesn't confuse the paratags. +% \begin{macrocode} +\RenewDocumentCommand\picture{O{}m} + { + \leavevmode + \keys_set:nn{tag/picture}{#1} % + \tl_set:Nn\l_@@_graphic_alt_dflt_tl {picture~environment} + \pictur@#2 + } +% \end{macrocode} +% inside the picture box we stop tagging. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@picture(#1,#2)(#3,#4){% + \@defaultunitsset\@picht{#2}\unitlength + \@defaultunitsset\@tempdimc{#1}\unitlength + \Gin@tag@struct@begin + \setbox\@picbox\hb@xt@\@tempdimc\bgroup + \tag_stop: %do not tag inside the picture box + \@defaultunitsset\@tempdimc{#3}\unitlength + \hskip -\@tempdimc + \@defaultunitsset\@tempdimc{#4}\unitlength + \lower\@tempdimc\hbox\bgroup + \ignorespaces} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\endpicture{% + \egroup\hss\egroup + \ht\@picbox\@picht\dp\@picbox\z@ + \picture@tag@bbox@attribute + \mbox{\box\@picbox} + \Gin@tag@struct@end} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Debugging code} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_graphic_show_bbox:nnnnnn} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_graphic_show_bbox:nnnnnn #1#2#3#4#5#6%#5 color, #6 graphic + { + \iow_log:n {tag/graphic~debug:~BBox~of~graphics~#6~is~#1~#2~#3~#4} + \hook_gput_code:nnn + {shipout/foreground} + {tag/graphic} + { + \int_compare:nNnT + {\g_shipout_readonly_int} + = + {\@@_ref_value:enn{_@@_graphic_#6}{abspage}{0}} + { + \put + (#1 bp,\dim_eval:n{-\paperheight + \dim_eval:n{#2 bp}}) + { + \opacity_select:n{0.5}\color_select:n{#5} + \rule + {\dim_eval:n {#3 bp-\dim_eval:n{#1 bp}}} + {\dim_eval:n {#4 bp-\dim_eval:n{#2 bp}}} + } + } + } + } + \cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_graphic_show_bbox:nnnnnn {VVVVne} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} + +% \begin{macrocode} +%</package> +% \end{macrocode} + +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latex-lab> +\ProvidesFile{graphic-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [2023-04-07 v0.8 code related to the tagging included graphics] +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-graphic} +%</latex-lab> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{implementation} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathpkg.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathpkg.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..14d8e943624 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathpkg.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-mathpkg.dtx +% +% Copyright (C) 2022,2023 The LaTeX Project +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% +% The development version of the bundle can be found below +% +% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab +% +% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue. +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-mathpkg.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% +% +% \title{The \texttt{latex-lab-mathpkg} code\thanks{}} +% \author{\LaTeX{} Project} +% +% \maketitle +% +% \newcommand\fmi[1]{\begin{quote} TODO: \itshape #1\end{quote}} +% \newcommand\NEW[1]{\marginpar{\mbox{}\hfill\fbox{New: #1}}} +% \providecommand\class[1]{\texttt{#1.cls}} +% \providecommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% +% \begin{abstract} +% \end{abstract} +% +% \tableofcontents +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% This file implements adaptions to various math packages needed for +% the tagging project. +% +% \MaybeStop{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex } +% +% \section{The Implementation} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<@@=math> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*kernel> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{File declaration} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesFile{latex-lab-mathpkg.ltx} + [2023-01-05 v0.1a mathpkg adaptions] +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsection{Tagpdf support} +% To make the code independent from tagging being loaded and active +% we load the \pkg{tagpdf-base} package: +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{tagpdf-base} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{package/breqn/after}{ + \RegisterMathEnvironment{dmath} + \RegisterMathEnvironment{dgroup*} + \AddToHook{env/dmath/begin}{\tagpdfparaOff} + \AddToHook{env/dgroup*/begin}{\tagpdfparaOff} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Force loading of \pkg{amsmath} before \pkg{cases}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook {package/cases/before}{\RequirePackage{amsmath}} +\AddToHook{package/cases/after}{ + \RegisterMathEnvironment{subnumcases} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%</kernel> +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsection{Wrapper files for testphase key} +% \Finale +% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathtagging.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathtagging.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..923001f5596 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathtagging.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,1280 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-mathtagging.dtx +% +% Copyright (C) 2022-2023 The LaTeX Project +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% +% The development version of the bundle can be found below +% +% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab +% +% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue. +% +% +\def\ltmathtaggingdate{2023-03-08} +\def\ltmathtaggingversion{v0.5a} +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex + +\usepackage{todonotes} + +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-mathtagging.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% +% +% \title{The \texttt{latex-lab-mathtagging} code\thanks{}} +% \author{Frank Mittelbach, Joseph Wright, \LaTeX{} Project} +% +% \maketitle +% +% \newcommand\NEW[1]{\marginpar{\mbox{}\hfill\fbox{New: #1}}} +% \providecommand\class[1]{\texttt{#1.cls}} +% \providecommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% +% ^^A \car {...} for marginal comments +% ^^A \car*{...} for longer inline comments +% +% \NewDocumentCommand\car{sO{}m} +% {\IfBooleanTF{#1}{\todo[inline,color=blue!10,#2]{#3}}^^A +% {\todo[color=blue!10,#2]{#3}}} +% +% \NewDocumentCommand\fmi{sO{}m} +% {\IfBooleanTF{#1}{\todo[inline,#2]{#3}}^^A +% {\todo[#2]{#3}}} +% +% +% +% \begin{abstract} +% This is an experimental prototype. It captures math material +% (basically okay, but the interfaces for packages aren't yet +% there) and tags the material (which is not yet anywhere near the +% final state). That part is provided for experimentation and to +% gather feedback, etc. +% \end{abstract} +% +% \tableofcontents +% +% \section{Introduction} +% \car*{Todo: update all the documentation! Both here and +% (what little there is!) in the implementation section.} +% +% This file implements capture of all math mode material at the outer +% level, i.e., a formula is captured in its entirety with inner text +% blocks (possibly containing further math) absorbed as part of the +% formula. For example, +%\begin{verbatim} +% \[ a \in A \text{ for all $a<5$} \] +%\end{verbatim} +% would only result in a single capture of the tokens +% ``\verb*/a \in A \text{ for all $a<5$}/''. +% +% \subsection{Code level interfaces} +% +% \begin{function}{\math_register_env:n, \math_register_env:nn} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{math_register_env:n} \Arg{env} +% \cs{math_register_env:nn} \Arg{env} \Arg{options} +% \end{syntax} +% Registers the \meta{env} as a math environment which should be captured +% and made available. This is necessary for all top-level math mode +% environments: low-level errors may result if these are not correct +% set up. One or more key--value \meta{options} may also be given: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item[\texttt{arg-spec}] The argument specification taken by the +% beginning of the environment; this is used to remove non-mathematical +% material. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{function}{\math_processor:n} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{math_processor:n} \Arg{tokens} +% \end{syntax} +% Declares that the captured math content should be passed to the +% \meta{tokens}, which will receive the environment type as |#1| and +% the content as |#2|. +% \end{function} +% +% \subsection{Document level interfaces} +% +% \begin{function}{\RegisterMathEnvironment} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{RegisterMathEnvironment} \oarg{options} \Arg{env} +% \end{syntax} +% Registers the \meta{env} as a math environment which should be captured +% and made available. This is necessary for all top-level math mode +% environments: low-level errors may result if these are not correct +% set up. One or more key--value \meta{options} may also be given: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item[\texttt{arg-spec}] The argument specification taken by the +% beginning of the environment; this is used to remove non-mathematical +% material. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{function} +% +% \section{Known current bugs, etc.} +% \car*{New Section, now with subsections.\\ +% As indicated, these lists are probably incomplete.\\ +% Some of these have been addressed in a more recent branch.} +% +% \subsection{Capture/grabbing problems} +% +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item Incorrect grabbing of |$|-math when there is also +% explicit |$|-math within a \textit{text environment} +% that is itself within the math that should all be grabbed. +% \item Similar incorrect grabbing with |$$| also. +% \item The grabbing, for all the display environments (and |\) \]|), needs +% to deal with nesting: \pkg{amsmath} contains code for this. +% \item +% \end{enumerate} +% +% \subsection{Other problems} +% +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item +% The presence of \cs{m@th} in association with \cs{ensuremath} +% does not necessarily indicate fakemath. This is because +% wanting mathsurround to be zero is very reasonable and common, +% \emph{even when the math is genuine} (and hence needs to be collected). +% \item User-defined environments can create problems; but this area, of +% new, copied and changed environments, has not yet been developed. +% +% \car*{Joseph wrote, inter alia:\\ +% My thinking [regarding] \cs{RegisterMathEnvironment}\\ +% - (New) Math environments should not be created-then-patched, but only +% generated by a [(future)] dedicated command (\cs{DeclareMathEnviornment}, +% presumably)\\ +% - Math environments created with \pkg{ltcmd} [commands] should not be copied, . . .\\ +% - Package authors should be able to manually set up math environments with a public boolean.} +% +% \item +% \end{enumerate} +% +% +% \subsection{Other ToDos} +% +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item Add (some of) the math display commands that were \enquote{lifted from +% plain}, e.g., \cs{displaylines} \cs{eqalign}(??). +% \item +% \end{enumerate} +% +% +% \car*{\cs{MaybeStop} (temporarily) not executed, as it is unknown on Chris' system.} +% \iffalse +% \MaybeStop{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex } +% \else +% \StopEventually{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex } +% \fi +% +% \section{The Implementation} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<@@=math> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*kernel> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{File declaration} +% +% \car{Change description here?} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesFile{latex-lab-mathtagging.ltx} + [\ltmathtaggingdate\space + \ltmathtaggingversion\space + Grab all the math(s) and tag it (experiments)] +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Temp loading \ldots +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-block-tagging}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOn +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Setup} +% +% Loading \pkg{amsmath} is an absolute requirement: this avoids needing to +% have conditional definitions and deals with how to define \cs{[}/\cs{]} +% neatly. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_gput_right:Nn \@kernel@before@begindocument + { \RequirePackage { amsmath } } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \subsection{Data structures} +% +% +% +% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_collected_bool} +% Tracks whether math mode material has been collected, which happens inside +% \pkg{amsmath} environments as well as those handled directly here. +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\bool_new:N \l_@@_collected_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \car{Change first tl name below: `env' $=>$ `info'?\\ +% Or do we need an extra storage tl?} +% +% \begin{variable}{\g_@@_grabbed_env_tl, \g_@@_grabbed_math_tl} +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \g_@@_grabbed_env_tl +\tl_new:N \g_@@_grabbed_math_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \subsection{Interface commands} +% +% \begin{macro} +% {\@@_process:nn, \@@_process:Vn, \@@_process_auxi:nn, \@@_process_auxii:nn} +% A no-op place-holder; the internal wrapper means that it does not need to +% be concerned with internals. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_process:nn #1#2 + { + \legacy_if:nF { measuring@ } + { + \tl_if_in:nnF {#2} { \m@th } + { \tl_trim_spaces_apply:nN {#2} \@@_process_auxi:nn {#1} } + } + } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_process:nn { V } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_process_auxi:nn #1#2 + { + \tl_gset:Nn \g_@@_grabbed_env_tl {#2} + \tl_gset:Nn \g_@@_grabbed_math_tl {#1} + \@@_process_auxii:nn {#2} {#1} + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_process_auxii:nn #1#2 { } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\math_processor:n} +% A simple installer +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \math_processor:n #1 + { \cs_set_protected:Npn \@@_process_auxii:nn ##1##2 {#1} } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Content grabbing} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_dollar:w} +% Grab up to a single |$|, for inline math mode, suppressing +% any processing if the first token is \tn{m@th}. +% +% \fmi{what's that test doing?} +% +% \car{It is some kind of fix, to avoid the remote +% possibility that the math is empty, making the code +% produce an unwanted \texttt{\$\$}.} +% +%\car{cf.~the code for this in \cs{@ensuredmath}} +% +%\car{It is harmless but unnecessary in the dollardollar grabbing below.} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_dollar:w % $ + #1 $ + { +% \end{macrocode} +% \fmi{what's that test doing?} +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_blank:nF {#1} + { + \@@_process:nn { math } {#1} % $ +% fairly simple this one + \tagmcend %end P-chunk, in code: \tag_mc_end_push: + \@kernel@math@begin + #1 $ + \@kernel@math@end + \tagmcbegin{} % restart P-chunk (whatsits in pdftex) + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_dollardollar:w} +% And for the classical \TeX{} display structure. +% \begin{macrocode} + +\skip_new:N \l_@@_tmpa_skip + +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_dollardollar:w % $$ + #1 $$ + { + \tl_if_blank:nF {#1} + { + \@@_tag_dollardollar_display:nn { equation* }{#1} + #1 + $$ + } + } + +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@kernel@close@P { + \tagmcend %end P-chunk, in code: \tag_mc_end_push: + \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_end_int + \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_show_bool + { \tag_mc_begin:n{artifact} + \rlap{\color_select:n{red}\tiny\ \int_use:N\g__tag_para_end_int} + \tag_mc_end: + } + \tag_struct_end: +} + + + +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_tag_dollardollar_display:nn #1#2 { + \@@_process:nn {#1} {#2} + \@kernel@close@P + \@kernel@math@begin +% \skip_set:Nn \belowdisplayskip {-\belowdisplayskip} +% \skip_set:Nn \belowdisplayshortskip {-\belowdisplayshortskip} +% \int_set:Nn \postdisplaypenalty {10000} +%% +% \group_insert_after:N \@@_tag_dollardollar_display_end: +} + +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_tag_dollardollar_display_end: { +% \typeout{== tag dollarldollar display end} +% \ShowTagging{struct-stack} + \tagpdfparaOff + \para_raw_end: + \tagpdfparaOn + \l_@@_tmpa_skip \lastskip + \@kernel@math@end + \penalty \postdisplaypenalty + \skip_vertical:n { -\l_@@_tmpa_skip } +% + \@doendpe % this has no \end{...} to take care of it +} + + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_inline:w} +% Collect inline math content and deal with the need to move to math mode. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_inline:w % \( + #1 \) + { + \tl_if_blank:nF {#1} + { + \@@_process:nn { math } {#1} + $ #1 $ + } + \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_collected_bool + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_eqn:w} +% For the most common use of \cs{[}/\cs{]}: turn into an environment. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_eqn:w % \[ + #1 \] + { +% \typeout{collected? = \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_collected_bool {true}{false}} + \begin { equation* } #1 \end { equation* } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Marking math environments} +% +% A general mechanism for math mode environments that do not grab their +% content (\emph{cf.}~most \pkg{amsmath} environments). +% +% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_env_name_tl} +% To allow us to carry out \enquote{special effects} +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_env_name_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% Here we set up specialised handling of environments. The idea for the +% \texttt{arg-spec} key is that if an environment takes arguments, we +% don't worry during the main grabbing. Rather, we remove the arguments +% from the grabbed content and forward only the payload. That is done by +% (ab)using \pkg{ltcmd}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\keys_define:nn { @@ } + { + arg-spec .code:n = + { + \ExpandArgs { c } \DeclareDocumentCommand + { @@_env \l_@@_env_name_tl _aux: } + {#1} + { \@@_env_forward:w } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\math_register_env:nn} +% \begin{macro}{\math_register_env:n} +% \begin{macro}{\RegisterMathEnvironment} +% Set up to capture environment content and make available. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \math_register_env:nn #1#2 + { + \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_env_name_tl {#1} + \keys_set:nn { @@ } {#2} + \cs_gset_eq:cc { @@_env_ #1 _begin: } {#1} + \cs_gset_eq:cc { @@_env_ #1 _end: } { end #1 } +% + \ExpandArgs { nnx } \RenewDocumentEnvironment {#1} { b } + { +% \bool_set_true:N \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool +% \cs_if_exist:cTF { @@_env #1 _aux: } +% { +% \exp_not:c { @@_env #1 _aux: } +% ####1 \exp_not:N \@@_env_end: {#1} +% } +% { \exp_not:N \@@_process:nn {#1} {####1} } + \exp_not:N \bool_if:NTF \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool + { +% \typeout{===>B1} + } + { +% \typeout{===>B2} + \cs_if_exist:cTF { @@_env #1 _aux: } + { + \exp_not:c { @@_env #1 _aux: } + ####1 \exp_not:N \@@_env_end: {#1} + } + { \exp_not:N \@@_process:nn {#1} {####1} } + \exp_not:n { \@kernel@math@registered@begin } + \bool_set_true:N \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool + } +% \exp_not:N \tracingall + \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _begin: } + ####1 + \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _end: } +% \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _end: } +% \exp_not:N \tracingnone +% \exp_not:n { \@kernel@math@registered@end } + } + { + } + } + +\cs_set_protected:Npn \__cs_tmp:w #1 + { + \group_begin: + \exp_args:No \__cs_generate_internal_variant:n + { \tl_to_str:n {#1} } + \group_end: + } +\__cs_tmp:w { nnxx } + + +\cs_new_protected:Npn \math_register_halign_env:nn #1#2 + { + \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_env_name_tl {#1} + \keys_set:nn { @@ } {#2} + \cs_gset_eq:cc { @@_env_ #1 _begin: } {#1} + \cs_gset_eq:cc { @@_env_ #1 _end: } { end #1 } +% + \ExpandArgs { nnxx } \RenewDocumentEnvironment {#1} { b } + { +% \bool_set_true:N \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool +% \cs_if_exist:cTF { @@_env #1 _aux: } +% { +% \exp_not:c { @@_env #1 _aux: } +% ####1 \exp_not:N \@@_env_end: {#1} +% } +% { \exp_not:N \@@_process:nn {#1} {####1} } + \exp_not:N \bool_if:NTF \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool + { +% \typeout{===>B1} + } + { +% \typeout{===>B2} + \cs_if_exist:cTF { @@_env #1 _aux: } + { + \exp_not:c { @@_env #1 _aux: } + ####1 \exp_not:N \@@_env_end: {#1} + } + { \exp_not:N \@@_process:nn {#1} {####1} } + \exp_not:n { \@kernel@math@registered@begin } + \bool_set_true:N \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool + } +% \exp_not:N \tracingall + \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _begin: } + ####1 +% \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _end: } +% \exp_not:N \tracingnone + } + { + \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _end: } + } + } + +\cs_new_protected:Npn \math_register_odd_env:nn #1#2 + { + \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_env_name_tl {#1} + \keys_set:nn { @@ } {#2} + \cs_gset_eq:cc { @@_env_ #1 _begin: } {#1} + \cs_gset_eq:cc { @@_env_ #1 _end: } { end #1 } +% + \ExpandArgs { nnxx } \RenewDocumentEnvironment {#1} { b } + { + \exp_not:N \bool_if:NTF \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool + { +% \typeout{===>B1} + } + { +% \typeout{===>B2} + \cs_if_exist:cTF { @@_env #1 _aux: } + { + \exp_not:c { @@_env #1 _aux: } + ####1 \exp_not:N \@@_env_end: {#1} + } + { \exp_not:N \@@_process:nn {#1} {####1} } + \exp_not:n { \@kernel@math@registered@begin } + \bool_set_true:N \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool + } +% \exp_not:N \tracingall + \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _begin: } + ####1 + } + { + \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _end: } +% needed if we don't have $$...$$ +% \exp_not:n { \typeout{---> @kernel@math@registered@end }} + \exp_not:n { \@kernel@math@registered@end } + } + } + + +% FMi: compare with block change! +% +% \DeclareRobustCommand*\begin[1]{% +% \UseHook{env/#1/before}% +% \@ifundefined{#1}% +% {\def\reserved@a{\@latex@error{Environment #1 undefined}\@eha}}% +% {\def\reserved@a{\def\@currenvir{#1}% +% \edef\@currenvline{\on@line}% +% \@execute@begin@hook{#1}% +% \csname #1\endcsname}}% +% \@ignorefalse +% \begingroup +% \@endpefalse % tmp!!! is it ok to drop this here? +% \reserved@a} + + +\cs_new:Npn \@kernel@math@registered@begin { +% \ShowTagging{struct-stack} +%\typeout{==>A1}\ShowTagging{struct-stack,mc-current} + \mode_if_vertical:TF + { +% \legacy_if:nTF { @endpe } +% { \legacy_if_set_false:n { @endpe } } +% { \__block_list_beginpar_vmode: } +% +% \typeout{==>~ at:~ \g__tag_struct_tag_tl} +% + \exp_args:Noo\str_if_eq:nnF \g__tag_struct_tag_tl { \l__tag_para_main_tag_tl } % needs correction! + { +% \typeout{==>A2} + \__block_beginpar_vmode: + } % needs correction! + } + { +% \typeout{==>A3} + \@kernel@close@P +% \tagmcend % needs correction! + } + \@kernel@math@begin + \tagpdfparaOff +% \typeout{==>MC1}\ShowTagging{mc-current} +} + +\cs_new:Npn \@kernel@math@registered@end { +% \typeout{==>MC2}\ShowTagging{mc-current} + \para_raw_end: + \tagpdfparaOn + \@kernel@math@end +% \typeout{==>MC3}\ShowTagging{mc-current} + \@endpetrue +} + +\cs_new_protected:Npn \math_register_env:n #1 + { \math_register_env:nn {#1} { } } +\NewDocumentCommand \RegisterMathEnvironment { O{} m } + { \math_register_env:nn {#2} {#1} } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_env_forward:w} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_env_forward:w #1 \@@_env_end: #2 + { \@@_process:nn {#2} {#1} } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Document commands} +% +% \car*{Add one more here: \texttt{displaymath}, which +% is equivalent to \cs{[} , \cs{]}\\ +% and hence to the basic \texttt{equation*}.\\ +% Added in more recent branch.} +% +% \begin{macro} +% {\equation, \@@_equation_begin:, \equation*, \@@_equation_star_begin:} +% \begin{macro} +% {\endequation, \@@_equation_end:, \endequation*, \@@_equation_star_end:} +% These environments are not set up by \pkg{amsmath} to collect their body, +% so we do that here. This has to be done \emph{after} we can be sure +% \pkg{amsmath} is loaded. +% +% \car*{Note that with \pkg{amsmath} loaded, \texttt{equation*} and \texttt{equation}\\ +% are the two basics: they are used to define the other single-row\\ +% display environments, etc.} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_gput_right:Nn \@kernel@before@begindocument + { + \math_register_env:n { equation } + \math_register_env:n { equation* } +% at the moment register_env can only do display math +% \math_register_env:n { math } + \RenewDocumentEnvironment{math} {b}{$#1$}{} +% and this one doesn't work either +% \math_register_env:n { displaymath } + \RenewDocumentEnvironment{displaymath} {b}{\[#1\]}{} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\(, \)} +% If math mode has not been collected, we need to do that; otherwise, worry +% about whether we are in math mode or not. The closing command here can only +% occur inside a collected math block: otherwise it will be simply used as +% a delimiter. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_gset_protected:Npn \( % \) + { + \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_collected_bool + { + \mode_if_math:TF + { \@badmath } + { $ } + } + { + \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_collected_bool + \@@_grab_inline:w + } + } % \( +\cs_gset_protected:Npn \) + { + \mode_if_math:TF + { $ } + { \@badmath } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\[, \]} +% Again, we need to watch for when \pkg{amsmath} is loaded after this code. +% The flag usage here is to cover the case where \cs{[}/\cs{]} is hidden +% inside another environment. In this case the grabbing happens on +% the outer level and should not be repeated. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_gput_right:Nn \@kernel@before@begindocument + { + \cs_gset_protected:Npn \[ % \] + { + \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_collected_bool + { \begin { equation* } } + { \@@_grab_eqn:w } + } % \[ + \cs_gset_protected:Npn \] + { + \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_collected_bool + { \end{ equation* } } + { \@badmath } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\ensuremath} +% A bit of nesting fun to make sure we collect only if required. +% \fmi{why does ensuremath need handling at all?} +% +% \car{Indeed! Currently, this is setup to process the math that +% it has anyways already captured as its argument; thus it is more +% efficient than leaving the capture to be repeated by the \cs{everymath}} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%\cs_gset_protected:Npn \ensuremath #1 +% { +% \mode_if_math:TF +% {#1} +% { +% \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_collected_bool +% { \@ensuredmath {#1} } +% { +% \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_collected_bool +% \@@_process:nn { math } {#1} +% \@ensuredmath {#1} +% \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_collected_bool +% } +% } +% } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{\cs{everymath} and \cs{everydisplay}} +% +% The business end for grabbing inline math and \enquote{raw} \TeX{} +% display. Most display math mode is actually handled elsewhere, as we +% have macro control. +% \begin{macrocode} + +\tl_new:N\tmpmathcontent + + +\def\@kernel@math@begin { +% \typeout{==>~math~begin} +% needs different handling if we support nesting + \tl_gset:Nx\tmpmathcontent + { + LaTeX~ formula~ starts~ + \exp_not:N\begin{\g__math_grabbed_env_tl} + \space + \exp_not:V\g__math_grabbed_math_tl + \space + \exp_not:N\end{\g__math_grabbed_env_tl} + \space LaTeX~ formula~ ends~ + } + \tagstructbegin{tag=Formula, + AFinline-o=\tmpmathcontent, + title-o=\g__math_grabbed_env_tl, + actualtext=\tmpmathcontent +% alt=\tmpmathcontent + } +% inner formula if multiple parts (not really implemented yet) + \grabaformulapartandstart +% the above does: +% \tagstructbegin{tag=Formula}\tagmcbegin{} +% or just +% \tagmcbegin{} +} +\def\@kernel@math@end { +% \typeout{==>~math~end} +% \ShowTagging{struct-stack} + \tagmcend + \if@subformulas + \tagstructend + \else + \fi + \tagstructend +% \ShowTagging{struct-stack} +} + +\exp_args:No \tex_everymath:D + { + \tex_the:D \tex_everymath:D + \bool_if:NF \l_@@_collected_bool + { + \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_collected_bool + \@@_grab_dollar:w + } + } +\exp_args:No \tex_everydisplay:D + { + \tex_the:D \tex_everydisplay:D + \iftrue % this may have to be a settable flag! +% { +% \typeout{==>~ in~ everydisplay} + \skip_set:Nn \belowdisplayskip {-\belowdisplayskip} + \skip_set:Nn \belowdisplayshortskip {-\belowdisplayshortskip} + \int_set:Nn \postdisplaypenalty {10000} +% + \group_insert_after:N \@@_tag_dollardollar_display_end: +% } + \fi + \bool_if:NF \l_@@_collected_bool + { + \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_collected_bool + \@@_grab_dollardollar:w + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Modifying kernel environments} +% +% We need to cover this even though it is, of course, not encouraged. +% \begin{macrocode} +\math_register_env:n { eqnarray } +\math_register_env:n { eqnarray* } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Places where math mode is (ab)used. +% \begin{macrocode} +\clist_map_inline:nn + { tabular } + { + \AddToHook{ env / #1 / begin } + { \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_collected_bool } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_m@th:, \m@th} +% Handle non-math use of math mode. At present nesting isn't supported as +% \cs{m@th} pops up in a few places that \emph{are} math mode! +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_m@th: \m@th +\cs_gset_protected:Npn \m@th + { + \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_collected_bool + \@@_m@th: + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Modifying \pkg{amsmath}} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_amsmath_align@:nn} +% \begin{macro} +% { +% \@@_amsmath_gather@:n , +% \@@_amsmath_multline@:n +% } +% \begin{macro}{\align@} +% \begin{macro}{\gather@, \multline@} +% Mark up all of the display environments as the content is captured anyway. +% We then use an internal macro in each environment type to insert the +% processing code. Each of these is slightly different, so we cannot use a +% simple loop here. The test for \cs{split@tag} is required as the +% \texttt{split} environment internally uses \texttt{gather} \emph{when not +% within an \pkg{amsmath}} environment, for example inside \texttt{equation}. +% Without the precaution, we'd get two copies of the grabbed math, the second +% of which would start with \cs{split@tag}. +% \begin{macrocode} + + + +\tl_gput_right:Nn \@kernel@before@begindocument { +% +\renewenvironment{gather*}{% + \start@gather\st@rredtrue +} +{% +% this redirection doesn't work if we alter "gather"! + % \endgather +% so replace it with its real meaning + \math@cr \black@\totwidth@ \egroup + $$\ignorespacesafterend +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\common@align@ending { + \math@cr \black@\totwidth@ + \egroup + \ifingather@ + \restorealignstate@ + \egroup + \nonumber + \ifnum0=`{\fi\iffalse}\fi + \else + $$% + \fi + \ignorespacesafterend +} +\renewenvironment{alignat}{% + \start@align\z@\st@rredfalse +}{% + \common@align@ending +} +\renewenvironment{alignat*}{% + \start@align\z@\st@rredtrue +}{% + \common@align@ending +} +\renewenvironment{xalignat}{% + \start@align\@ne\st@rredfalse +}{% + \common@align@ending +} +\renewenvironment{xalignat*}{% + \start@align\@ne\st@rredtrue +}{% + \common@align@ending +} +\renewenvironment{xxalignat}{% + \start@align\tw@\st@rredtrue +}{% + \common@align@ending +} +\renewenvironment{align}{% + \start@align\@ne\st@rredfalse\m@ne +}{% + \common@align@ending +} +\renewenvironment{align*}{% + \start@align\@ne\st@rredtrue\m@ne +}{% + \common@align@ending +} +\renewenvironment{flalign}{% + \start@align\tw@\st@rredfalse\m@ne +}{% + \common@align@ending +} +\renewenvironment{flalign*}{% + \start@align\tw@\st@rredtrue\m@ne +}{% + \common@align@ending +} +% +\renewenvironment{multline*}{\start@multline\st@rredtrue} +{% + \iftagsleft@ \@xp\lendmultline@ \else \@xp\rendmultline@ \fi + \ignorespacesafterend +} +% \end{macrocode} +% Also for "false?" +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\measuring@true{\let\ifmeasuring@\iftrue\tag_stop:} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +% + \math_register_halign_env:nn {align}{} + \math_register_halign_env:nn {align*}{} + \math_register_halign_env:nn {flalign}{} + \math_register_halign_env:nn {flalign*}{} + \math_register_halign_env:nn {gather}{} + \math_register_halign_env:nn {gather*}{} + \math_register_halign_env:nn {multline}{} + \math_register_halign_env:nn {multline*}{} + \math_register_halign_env:nn {xalignat}{} + \math_register_halign_env:nn {xalignat*}{} + \math_register_halign_env:nn {xxalignat}{} + % + \@namedef{maketag @ @ @} #1{% +% \typeout{--->maketag @ @ @} + \ifmeasuring@ + \hbox{\m@th\normalfont#1}% + \else + \tagmcend \tagstructbegin{tag=Lbl}% + \tagmcbegin{tag=Lbl}% + \hbox{\m@th\normalfont#1}% + \tagmcend \tagstructend \tagmcbegin{}% + \fi + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\intertext@{% + \def\intertext##1{% + \ifvmode\else\\\@empty\fi + \noalign{% +% we have to flip the sign on the skip because we flipped it on the outside + \penalty\postdisplaypenalty\vskip-\belowdisplayskip + \vbox{ +% \end{macrocode} +% Stop tagging when measuring: +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifmeasuring@\tag_stop:\fi + \normalbaselines + \ifdim\linewidth=\columnwidth + \else \parshape\@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% End the previous mc:\fmi{if we use 2 levels of formulas this would +% need changing} +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_mc_end_push: +% \end{macrocode} +% We are already in a par so we change now to Span:\fmi{not true any longer} +% \begin{macrocode} + \tagpdfsetup{paratag=P}% + \tagpdfparaOn + \noindent\ignorespaces##1\par +% \end{macrocode} +% Restart the MC +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}}% + \penalty\predisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayskip% + }% + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{math@cr @ @ @ gather}{% + \ifst@rred\nonumber\fi + &\relax + \make@display@tag +% + \maybestartnewformulatag +% + \ifst@rred\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi + \global\advance\row@\@ne + \cr +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{math@cr @ @ @ align}{% + \ifst@rred\nonumber\fi + \if@eqnsw \global\tag@true \fi + \global\advance\row@\@ne + \add@amps\maxfields@ + \omit + \kern-\alignsep@ + \iftag@ + \setboxz@h{\@lign\strut@{\make@display@tag}}% + \place@tag + \fi +% + \maybestartnewformulatag +% + \ifst@rred\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi + \global\lineht@\z@ + \cr +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\restore@math@cr{\@namedef{math@cr @ @ @}{ +% + \maybestartnewformulatag +% + \cr}} +\restore@math@cr +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% + +% \begin{macro}{} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_at_nl_first:w #1 \\ #2 \\ #3 \s_stop + { + \quark_if_nil:nTF {#2} + { {#1} { } } + { + \@@_split_chk_if_begin:ww #1 \begin \q_nil \s_mark + #2 \\ #3 \s_stop + } + } +\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_chk_if_begin:ww #1 \begin #2 #3 \s_mark + #4 \\ \q_nil \\ \s_stop + { + \quark_if_nil:nTF {#2} + { {#1} {#4} } + { + \exp_after:wN \@@_split_collect_one_end:w + \@@_split_cleanup_begin_q_nil:w #1 \begin{#2} #3 \\ #4 \s_stop + { } { 1 } + } + } +\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_cleanup_begin_q_nil:w #1 \begin \q_nil {#1} +\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_collect_one_end:w #1 \end #2 #3 \s_stop #4 #5 + { + \exp_args:Nf \@@_split_check_count_begins:nnnn + { \@@_split_count_begins:n { #4 #1 } } {#5} + { #4 #1 \end{#2} } {#3} + } +\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_count_begins:n #1 + { \int_eval:n { 0 \@@_split_count_begins:w #1 \begin \q_nil } } +\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_count_begins:w #1 \begin #2 + { \quark_if_nil:nF {#2} { +1 \@@_split_count_begins:w } } +\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_check_count_begins:nnnn #1 #2 #3 #4 + { + \int_compare:nNnTF {#1} = {#2} + { + \exp_last_unbraced:Nf \@@_split_final_cleanup:nn + { \split:n { \@@_split_guard:n {#3} #4 } } + } + { + \exp_args:No \use_ii_i:nn + { \exp_after:wN { \int_value:w \int_eval:n { #2 + 1 } } } + { \@@_split_collect_one_end:w #4 \s_stop {#3} } + } + } +\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_final_cleanup:nn #1 #2 + { + \exp:w \@@_split_final_cleanup:w #1 + \@@_split_guard:n \q_nil \s_mark { } + {#2} + } +\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_final_cleanup:w #1 \@@_split_guard:n #2 #3 \s_mark #4 + { + \quark_if_nil:nTF {#2} + { \exp_end: { #4 #1 } } + { \@@_split_final_cleanup:w #3 \s_mark { #4 #1 #2 } } + } +\NewDocumentCommand \splitnl { mm +m } + { + \tl_set:Nf \l_tmpa_tl { \split:n {#3} } + \show \l_tmpa_tl + \exp_after:wN \__splitnl_aux:nnNN \l_tmpa_tl #1 #2 + } + + +\cs_new:Npn \split:n #1 { + \@@_split_at_nl_first:w #1 \\ \q_nil \\ \s_stop } + +\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_at_nl:NN #1#2 { + \tl_set:Nf \l_tmpa_tl { + \exp_after:wN \@@_split_at_nl_first:w #1 \\ \q_nil \\ \s_stop } + \exp_after:wN \@@_split_at_nl_aux:nnNN \l_tmpa_tl #1 #2 +} + +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_split_at_nl_aux:nnNN #1 #2 #3 #4 + { + \tl_gset:Nn #4 {#1} + \tl_gset:Nn #3 {#2} +} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\maybestartnewformulatag} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + +\newif\if@subformulas +\tl_new:N \result + +\cs_new_protected:Npn\grabaformulapartandstart { + \@@_split_at_nl:NN \g__math_grabbed_math_tl \result + \typeout{====>first-result=\meaning\result} + \typeout{====>first-tmpmathcontent=\meaning\g__math_grabbed_math_tl} + \tl_if_empty:NTF \g__math_grabbed_math_tl + { + \typeout{====>formula~ has~ no~ subparts} + \global\@subformulasfalse + } + { + \typeout{====>formula~ has~ subparts} + \global\@subformulastrue + \edef\resulttitle{\g__math_grabbed_env_tl\space (part)} + \tagstructbegin{tag=Formula, +% \end{macrocode} +% For now we don't put anything in /alt or /ActualText on subformulas +% \begin{macrocode} +% alt=\result, + title-o=\resulttitle + } + } + \tagmcbegin{} +} + +\cs_new_protected:Npn\grabaformulapartandmayberestart { + \@@_split_at_nl:NN \g__math_grabbed_math_tl \result + \typeout{====>result=\meaning\result} + \typeout{====>tmpmathcontent=\meaning\g__math_grabbed_math_tl} +% \tl_if_empty:NTF \g__math_grabbed_math_tl +% { +% \typeout{====>tmpmathcontent=empty} +% } +% { +% \typeout{====>tmpmathcontent=not-empty} + \edef\resulttitle{\g__math_grabbed_env_tl\space (part)} + \tagstructbegin{tag=Formula, + alt=\result, + title-o=\resulttitle + } +% } + \tagmcbegin{} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\maybestartnewformulatag { +\if@subformulas + \ifmeasuring@\else +% + \tl_if_empty:NF \g__math_grabbed_math_tl + { + \tagmcend + \tagstructend + \grabaformulapartandmayberestart + } + \fi +\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The breqn packages changes catcodes and that isn't yet covered +% by our mechanism. +% \begin{macrocode} +%\AddToHook{package/breqn/after}{ +% \typeout{===>~ in~ hook} +% \math_register_halign_env:nn {dmath}{} +% \math_register_halign_env:nn {dgroup*}{} +%} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOff +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<@@=> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%</kernel> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \Finale +% +% + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathtools.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathtools.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c3f43243b10 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathtools.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,223 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-mathtools.dtx +% +% Copyright (C) 2022,2023 The LaTeX Project +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% +% The development version of the bundle can be found below +% +% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab +% +% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue. +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-amsmath.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% +% +% \title{The \texttt{latex-lab-mathtools} code\thanks{}} +% \author{\LaTeX{} Project} +% +% \maketitle +% +% \newcommand\fmi[1]{\begin{quote} TODO: \itshape #1\end{quote}} +% \newcommand\NEW[1]{\marginpar{\mbox{}\hfill\fbox{New: #1}}} +% \providecommand\class[1]{\texttt{#1.cls}} +% \providecommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% +% \begin{abstract} +% \end{abstract} +% +% \tableofcontents +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% This file implements adaptions to the \pkg{mathtools} package needed for +% the tagging project. +% +% \MaybeStop{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex } +% +% \section{The Implementation} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<@@=math> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*kernel> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{File declaration} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesFile{latex-lab-mathtools.ltx} + [2023-01-05 v0.1a mathtools adaptions] +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsection{Tagpdf support} +% To make the code independent from tagging being loaded and active +% we load the \pkg{tagpdf-base} package: +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{tagpdf-base} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{\cs{shortintertext}} +% Similar to the \cs{intertext} command from amsmath, +% \cs{shortintertext} errors with active tagging as it is processed twice +% which leads to duplicated structures. +% The fix is similar but is complicated as \pkg{mathtools} defines two version (and +% an additional \cs{intertext} version) and package options to switch between the variants. +% +% At first we redefine all the internal commands +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOn +\tl_new:N\l_@@_mathtools_init_tl +\AddToHook{package/mathtools/after} + {% + \cs_if_eq:NNTF\intertext@ \MT_intertext: + { + \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_mathtools_init_tl {\MT_orig_intertext_false:} + } + { + \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_mathtools_init_tl {\MT_orig_intertext_true:} + } + \cs_if_eq:NNTF\shortintertext@ \MT_shortintertext:n + { + \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_mathtools_init_tl + {\MT_orig_shortintertext_false:} + } + { + \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_mathtools_init_tl + {\MT_orig_shortintertext_true:} + } + \def\MT_intertext: {% + \def\intertext##1{% + \ifvmode\else\\\@empty\fi + \noalign{% + \penalty\postdisplaypenalty\vskip\belowdisplayskip + \vskip-\lineskiplimit % CCS + \vskip\normallineskiplimit % CCS + \vskip\l_MT_above_intertext_sep + \vbox{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Stop tagging when measuring: +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifmeasuring@\tag_stop:\fi + \normalbaselines + \ifdim + \ifdim\@totalleftmargin=\z@ + \linewidth + \else + -\maxdimen + \fi + =\columnwidth + \else \parshape\@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% End the previous mc: +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_mc_end_push: +% \end{macrocode} +% We are already in a par so we change now to Span: +% \begin{macrocode} + \tagpdfsetup{paratag=Span} + \noindent\ignorespaces##1\par +% \end{macrocode} +% Restart the MC +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}}% + \penalty\predisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayskip% + \vskip-\lineskiplimit % CCS + \vskip\normallineskiplimit % CCS + \vskip\l_MT_below_intertext_sep + }% + }% + \MH_let:NwN \shortintertext \shortintertext@ + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\MT_orig_shortintertext:n #1{% + \ifvmode\else\\\@empty\fi + \noalign{% + \penalty\postdisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayshortskip + \vbox{% + \ifmeasuring@\tag_stop:\fi + \normalbaselines + \MH_if_dim:w + \MH_if_dim:w \@totalleftmargin=\z@ + \linewidth + \MH_else: + -\maxdimen + \MH_fi: + =\columnwidth + \MH_else: + \parshape\@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth + \MH_fi: + \tag_mc_end_push: + \tagpdfsetup{paratag=Span} + \noindent\ignorespaces#1\par + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}} + \penalty\predisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayshortskip% + }% + } + + \def\MT_shortintertext:n #1{% + \ifvmode\else\\\@empty\fi + \noalign{% + \penalty\postdisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayshortskip + \vskip-\lineskiplimit + \vskip\normallineskiplimit + \vskip\l_MT_above_shortintertext_sep + \vbox{% + \ifmeasuring@\tag_stop:\fi + \normalbaselines + \MH_if_dim:w + \MH_if_dim:w \@totalleftmargin=\z@ + \linewidth + \MH_else: + -\maxdimen + \MH_fi: + =\columnwidth + \MH_else: + \parshape\@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth + \MH_fi: + \tag_mc_end_push: + \tagpdfsetup{paratag=Span} + \noindent\ignorespaces#1\par + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}}% + \penalty\predisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayshortskip% + \vskip-\lineskiplimit + \vskip\normallineskiplimit + \vskip\l_MT_below_shortintertext_sep + }% + } + +% \end{macrocode} +% end hook +% \begin{macrocode} + \l_@@_mathtools_init_tl +} +\ExplSyntaxOff +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%</kernel> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \Finale +% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-minipage.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-minipage.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..00b1d649a14 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-minipage.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,202 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-minipage.dtx (C) Copyright 2023 LaTeX Project +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% +% The development version of the bundle can be found below +% +% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab +% +% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue. +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-minipage.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% + +\def\ltlistsversion{v0.81} +\def\ltlistsdate{2023/05/10} + +% +% \title{The \textsf{latex-lab-minipage} package\\ +% Changes related to the tagging of minipage and parbox} +% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial implementation done by Ulrike Fischer}} +% \date{\ltlistsversion\ \ltlistsdate} +% +% \maketitle +% +% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}} +% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}} +% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class +% customizations}} +% +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% +% \begin{abstract} +% \end{abstract} +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% How to tag minipages and parboxes is still under discussion. +% But as they start and contain paragraphs it is clear that +% hooks are needed to interrupt and restart the tagging. +% +% The tagging added is currently quite simple minded. See the todo-testfiles and the +% code comments for some open points. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*package> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \section{Implementation} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesExplPackage {latex-lab-testphase-minipage} {2023-05-10} {0.81} + {Code related to the tagging of minipages and parboxes} +% \end{macrocode} +% + +% \subsection{Provide the kernel hooks} +% [kernel?] +% We need to check/set the status before the +% initial \cs{leavevmode} to decide how to handle the structure. +% Perhaps the same command will work for both? +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@kernel@init@minipage{} +\def\@kernel@init@parbox{} +% \end{macrocode} +% We need a few hooks. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@kernel@before@minipage{} +\def\@kernel@after@minipage{} +\def\@kernel@before@parbox{} +\def\@kernel@after@parbox{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Patch minipage} +% [kernel?] +% The begin hook is inserted in \cs{@iiiminipage} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@iiiminipage#1#2[#3]#4{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Before switching to hmode we insert a hook. It is currently unused +% but could for example check if we are in vmode and change the following +% paragraph tag. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@kernel@init@minipage + \leavevmode + \@pboxswfalse + \setlength\@tempdima{#4}% + \def\@mpargs{{#1}{#2}[#3]{#4}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% insert the hook +% \begin{macrocode} + \@kernel@before@minipage% new + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup + \color@begingroup + \hsize\@tempdima + \textwidth\hsize \columnwidth\hsize + \@parboxrestore + \def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}\def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}\c@mpfootnote\z@ + \let\@footnotetext\@mpfootnotetext + \let\@listdepth\@mplistdepth \@mplistdepth\z@ + \@minipagerestore + \@setminipage} +% \end{macrocode} +% And a hook at the end +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\endminipage{% + \par + \unskip + \ifvoid\@mpfootins\else + \vskip\skip\@mpfootins + \normalcolor + \footnoterule + \unvbox\@mpfootins + \fi + \@minipagefalse %% added 24 May 89 + \color@endgroup + \egroup +% \end{macrocode} +% as the parbox command is called, we must prevent that it adds its additional +% tagging commands: +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_stop:n{minipage} + \expandafter\@iiiparbox\@mpargs{\unvbox\@tempboxa}% + \tag_start:n{minipage} + \@kernel@after@minipage%new end ... + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% And similar for \cs{parbox} +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\@iiiparbox#1#2[#3]#4#5{% + \@kernel@init@parbox + \leavevmode + \@pboxswfalse + \setlength\@tempdima{#4}% + \@kernel@before@parbox% new + \@begin@tempboxa\vbox{\hsize\@tempdima\@parboxrestore#5\@@par}% + \ifx\relax#2\else + \setlength\@tempdimb{#2}% + \edef\@parboxto{to\the\@tempdimb}% + \fi + \if#1b\vbox + \else\if #1t\vtop + \else\ifmmode\vcenter + \else\@pboxswtrue $\vcenter + \fi\fi\fi + \@parboxto{\let\hss\vss\let\unhbox\unvbox + \csname bm@#3\endcsname}% + \if@pboxsw \m@th$\fi + \@end@tempboxa% + \@kernel@after@parbox%new end + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Tagging commands} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l__ltboxes_tag_tl +\tl_set:Nn \l__ltboxes_tag_tl {Div} +\cs_set_protected:Npn\@kernel@before@minipage + { +% \end{macrocode} +% As there was a \cs{leavevmode} before that is a P/text open that we have to close. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_mc_end_push:\tag_struct_end: +% \end{macrocode} +% TODO: the P can be further up, we need a proper method to test and handle this. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=\l__ltboxes_tag_tl}} +\cs_set_protected:Npn\@kernel@after@minipage + {\tag_struct_end:\tag_struct_begin:n{tag=\l__tag_para_tag_tl}\tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}} +\cs_set_protected:Npn\@kernel@before@parbox + {\tag_mc_end_push:\tag_struct_end:\tag_struct_begin:n{tag=\l__ltboxes_tag_tl}} +\cs_set_protected:Npn\@kernel@after@parbox + {\tag_struct_end:\tag_struct_begin:n{tag=\l__tag_para_tag_tl}\tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +%</package> +% \end{macrocode} + +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latex-lab> +\ProvidesFile{minipage-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [2022-10-26 v0.8 code related to the tagging of sectioning commands] +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-minipage} +%</latex-lab> +% \end{macrocode} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or-1.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or-1.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ef799e813c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or-1.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,159 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-new-or-1.dtx (C) Copyright 2020-2023 Frank Mittelbach +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} + +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-new-or-1.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% +% +% +% \title{Temporary output patches for tagging and better link support} +% \author{Frank Mittelbach \and Ulrike Fischer} +% +% \maketitle +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% This file contains a few patches of internal \LaTeX{} commands +% to support paragraph tagging across +% page boundaries (in \pdfTeX) and improve the behaviour of links across page breaks. +% +% Until this get properly integrated with the kernel code this has +% to be taken as a prototype and code, interfaces as well as +% behavior may change without notice and certainly without any +% backwards compatibility! +% +% +% \StopEventually{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex } +% +% +% \section{The Implementation} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*code> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesPackage{latex-lab-testphase-new-or-1} + [2022-11-94 v0.1a Temporary output patches for tagging and better link support] +\RequirePackage{etoolbox} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \subsection{Patching the OR} +% This adds hooks around header and footer, in \cs{@makecol} and in multicol. +% At first initialize some of the hooks. We use providecommand to avoid problems if +% the kernel changes here and provides them directly. +% \begin{macrocode} +\providecommand\@kernel@before@head{} +\providecommand\@kernel@before@foot{} +\providecommand\@kernel@after@head{} +\providecommand\@kernel@after@foot{} +\providecommand\@mult@ptagging@hook{}% multicol +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + +\patchcmd\@outputpage + {\vfil\color@hbox\normalcolor\hb@xt@\textwidth{\@thehead}\color@endbox} + {\vfil\@kernel@before@head\color@hbox\normalcolor\hb@xt@\textwidth{\@thehead}\color@endbox\@kernel@after@head} + {\typeout{Patching header in \string\@outputpage}}{\PATCHerror } + + +\patchcmd\@outputpage + {\color@hbox\normalcolor\hb@xt@\textwidth{\@thefoot}\color@endbox} + {\@kernel@before@foot\color@hbox\normalcolor\hb@xt@\textwidth{\@thefoot}\color@endbox\@kernel@after@foot} + {\typeout{Patching footer in \string\@outputpage}}{\PATCHerror } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@makecol} +% We have to patch \cs{@makecol} in two places: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% update 255 up front to add missing tmb/tme if necessary +% \item +% update the \cs{footins} stream if that one got split +% \end{itemize} +% +% We patch \cs{@makecol}, if new-or-2 is loaded too it will overwrite that again. +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand\@kernel@before@footins{} + \providecommand\@kernel@before@cclv{} + + \patchcmd\@makecol + {\vskip\skip\footins} + {\vskip\skip\footins\@kernel@before@footins} + {\typeout{Patching \string\@makecol\space for tagging}}{\PATCHerror } + +%for some reason patching with etoolbox only works in this order ... + + \pretocmd\@makecol{\@kernel@before@cclv} + {\typeout{Patching \string\@makecol\space for tagging}}{\PATCHerror } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{\pkg{multicol} adjustments} +% +% The patches for pkg{multicol} are fairly minimal: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item At the start of the environment anything already on the +% page is picked up and stored in \cs{partial@page}, we may need to add +% a TMB to that (it should have a proper TME). This has to happen +% in the \enquote{main} stream context. +% \item +% \item +% \end{itemize} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{package/multicol/after} + {% multicol needs later loading +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \patchcmd\page@sofar + {\global\dimen\tw@\dp\z@}% + {% + \global\dimen\tw@\dp\z@ + \@mult@ptagging@hook + }% + {\typeout{Patching \string\page@sofar\space for tagging}}{\PATCHerror}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Interrupt hooks} +% This requires the l3pdfannot module! +% We add the code here and not in hyperref, as it should also work with links +% created directly with the l3pdfannot commands. The file is only +% loaded by the pdfmanagement, so no need to test if the commands exist. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOn +\def\@kernel@before@head{\pdfannot_link_off:} +\def\@kernel@before@foot{\pdfannot_link_off:} +\def\@kernel@after@head {\pdfannot_link_on:} +\def\@kernel@after@foot {\pdfannot_link_on:} +\ExplSyntaxOff +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%</code> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \Finale +% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or-2.dtx index 08b58a72860..74d56d687f6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or-2.dtx @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -%% File: latex-lab-new-or.dtx +%% File: latex-lab-new-or-2.dtx % Copyright (C) 2022 The LaTeX Project % % It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the @@ -22,14 +22,14 @@ \EnableCrossrefs \CodelineIndex \begin{document} - \DocInput{latex-lab-new-or.dtx} + \DocInput{latex-lab-new-or-2.dtx} \end{document} %</driver> % % \fi % % -% \title{The \texttt{latex-lab-new-or} code\thanks{}} +% \title{The \texttt{latex-lab-testphase-new-or-2} code\thanks{}} % \author{Frank Mittelbach, \LaTeX{} Project} % % \maketitle @@ -128,8 +128,8 @@ % % \subsection{File declaration} % \begin{macrocode} -\ProvidesFile{latex-lab-new-or.ltx} - [2022-03-09 v0.1b changes to the output routine] +\ProvidesPackage{latex-lab-testphase-new-or-2} + [2022-11-04 v0.1c changes to the output routine] % \end{macrocode} % \subsection{\cs{@makecol} reimplementation} % diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-sec.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-sec.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5df3803b548 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-sec.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,819 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-sec.dtx (C) Copyright 2022-2023 LaTeX Project +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% +% The development version of the bundle can be found below +% +% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab +% +% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue. +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-sec.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% +% +% \title{The \textsf{latex-lab-sec} package\\ +% Changes related to the tagging of sectioning commands} +% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial implementation done by Ulrike Fischer}} +% \date{v0.83 2023-06-07} +% +% \maketitle +% +% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}} +% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}} +% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class +% customizations}} +% +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% +% \begin{abstract} +% The following code implements a first draft for the tagging of sectioning commands. +% \end{abstract} +% +% \section{Limitations} +% +% Sectioning commands are in not defined by the format but by the classes. +% Their implementation vary: some are defined with the help of \cs{@startsection}, +% some are like \cs{chapter} handcrafted, +% some build with the help of extension packages or as in the KOMA classes +% with class code that extends the \cs{@startsection} functionality. +% +% The following code can therefore currently be used \emph{only} with the standard classes +% or with classes which do not overwrite the changed definitions. +% +% +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% Tagging of sectioning commands consist of two parts: +% +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The heading/title text of the section should be surrounded by a +% heading tag, typically \texttt{Hn} with some value of \texttt{n}. +% The number of the section command can optionally be put in a \texttt{Lbl}. +% The number of the \texttt{Hn} tag should reflect the \enquote{natural} level. +% So in an article \cs{section} will use \texttt{H1}, in a book \cs{chapter} will use +% \texttt{H1} and \cs{section} \texttt{H2}. +% Titles of \cs{part} are a bit out of this system as they are normally +% not part of the hierarchy: often only some chapters are grouped under a part. +% Their title is therefore tagged as \texttt{Title}. +% \item +% The whole section should normally be surrounded by +% a \texttt{Sect} tag. Parts should be surrounded by \texttt{Part}. +% It is a bit unclear if the headings should be inside or outside of these +% structures---the best practice guide puts them outside---but on the whole +% it sounds more logical to group the heading with the text inside the \texttt{Sect}. +% For the part this is actually required, as there can be only one \texttt{Title} +% in a structure, so the part title can't be at the same level as the +% document \texttt{Title}. +% +% Starting such an enclosing \texttt{Sect} structure is rather easy, +% but closing it requires code in various place, +% for example the commands \cs{mainmatter}, \cs{backmatter}, +% \cs{frontmatter} and \cs{appendix} should typically close everything. +% Following sectioning commands should close all previous structures +% with a level equal or higher than their own level. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \section{Technical details and problems} +% +% The implementation has to take care of various details. +% +% \begin{itemize} +% +% \item As sections in \LaTeX{} are not environments, the +% \texttt{<Sect>} structures can be wrongly nested with other structures. For example +% if a document puts a sectioning command into a list or a trivlist or +% a minipage then it can no longer close previous \texttt{<Sect>} structures correctly. +% The problem can be detected by checking the structure stack +% and a warning can be issued, but the author then has to close the structures +% manually before the list or minipage. +% +% Thus there have to be user interfaces to handle such cases. +% It should also be possible not to create all the \texttt{<Sect>} structures +% automatically but to tag only the headings so that the author can handle special +% cases manually. +% +% \item If hyperref is used, targets for links should be inserted, either with +% \cs{refstepcounter} or manually with \cs{MakeLinkTarget}. These targets must be +% in the correct structure for the structure destinations. They replace some +% of the current patches in hyperref. +% +% \item With lualatex the mc-commands set attributes \emph{locally}, so the +% commands must be at the right grouping level. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \subsection{Funktions and keys} +% +% \begin{function}{\tag_tool:n,\tagtool} +% +% \end{function} +% +% \subsection{TODO} +% +% \begin{itemize} +% \item A dedicated command to close a sectioning unit should be provided. +% +% \item A dedicated command to open a sectioning unit should be provided too. +% +% \item It should also be possible to suppress the sectioning unit in sectioning commands +% to allow e.g. to put an epigraph or similar in front. +% +% \item The number in \cs{part} and \cs{chapter} is currently not correctly +% tagged as a \texttt{Lbl} as this requires to redefine the internal (class dependant) +% commands too. +% +% \end{itemize} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*package> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \section{Implementation} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesExplPackage {latex-lab-testphase-sec} {2023-05-20} {0.81} + {Code related to the tagging of sectioning commands} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Surrounding by \texttt{Sect} structures} +% We use a stack to record the levels of the open \texttt{Sect}. The first item +% has level -100. A sectioning command will take a record from the stack. If its level is +% greater or equal it closes this structure and takes the next record from the stack. +% If the record has a smaller level then it puts it back and stops. +% The stack is compared with the main structure stack, if they don't match +% it means we can't safely close the \texttt{Sect} and so we issue a warning +% and do nothing. +% +% \subsubsection{Loading general kernel changes} +% [kernel?] +% Also loaded in the toc-tagging code. +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-kernel-changes} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +%</package> +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsubsection{Glyphtounicode improvements} +% +% As lualatex runs with legacy encodings in the test files, we enable and +% load glyphtounicode. For the math we load additional definitions. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*kernelchange> +\ifdefined\directlua + \pdfvariable gentounicode =1 + \protected\def\pdfglyphtounicode {\pdfextension glyphtounicode } + \protected\edef\pdfgentounicode {\pdfvariable gentounicode} + \input{glyphtounicode} +\fi +\ifdefined\pdfglyphtounicode + \input{glyphtounicode-cmex} +\fi +%</kernelchange> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{updating \cs{@currentHref}} +% [kernel?] +% +% We must ensure that manual targets (e.g. in unnumbered sections) +% correctly update \cs{@currentHref}. For this we extend the kernel definition of +% \cs{MakeLinkTarget} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*kernelchange> +\ExplSyntaxOn +\int_new:N\g__kernel_target_int +\RenewDocumentCommand\MakeLinkTarget{sO{}m} + {% + \ifvmode + \special{}% + \else + \@savsf\spacefactor + \smash{}% + \spacefactor\@savsf + \fi + \IfBooleanTF {#1} + { + \tl_gset:Nx \@currentHref {#3} + } + { + \int_gincr:N\g__kernel_target_int + \tl_gset:Nx \@currentHref {target*.\int_use:N\g__kernel_target_int} + } + } +\ExplSyntaxOff +%</kernelchange> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*package> +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsubsection{Tagging commands} +% +% +% \begin{variable}{\g__tag_sec_stack_seq} +% The stack holds the tag and the level. +% \begin{macrocode} +\seq_new:N \g__tag_sec_stack_seq +\seq_gpush:Nn\g__tag_sec_stack_seq {{Document}{-100}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{variable}{\l__tag_sec_Sect_bool} +% This boolean controls if a Sect structure is opened. +% \begin{macrocode} +\bool_new:N \l__tag_sec_Sect_bool +\bool_set_true:N\l__tag_sec_Sect_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} + +% +% \begin{macro}{\__tag_sec_begin:nn} +% This starts a sectioning structure. +% Currently the tag is fix, either Sect or Part, depending on the level, +% but this will perhaps change. The second argument is currently unused. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn\__tag_sec_begin:nn #1 #2 %#1 level #2 keyval + { + \tag_struct_begin:n + { + tag= {\int_compare:nNnTF {#1}={-1}{Part}{Sect}} + ,#2 + } + \seq_gpush:Nx \g__tag_sec_stack_seq {{\g__tag_struct_tag_tl}{\int_eval:n{#1}}} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\__tag_sec_end:n} +% \begin{macrocode} +\msg_new:nnn { tag } {wrong-sect-nesting} + { + The~structure~#1~can~not~be~closed.\\ + It~is~not~equal~to~the~current~structure~#2~on~the~main~stack + } + +\cs_new_protected:Npn\__tag_sec_end:n #1 % #1 level + { + \seq_get:NN \g__tag_sec_stack_seq \l__tag_tmpa_tl + \int_compare:nNnT {#1}<{\exp_last_unbraced:NV\use_ii:nn\l__tag_tmpa_tl+1} + { + \seq_get:NN\g__tag_struct_tag_stack_seq \l__tag_tmpb_tl + \exp_args:Nee + \tl_if_eq:nnTF + {\exp_last_unbraced:NV\use_i:nn\l__tag_tmpa_tl} + {\exp_last_unbraced:NV\use_i:nn\l__tag_tmpb_tl} + { + \seq_gpop:NN \g__tag_sec_stack_seq \l__tag_tmpa_tl + \tag_struct_end: + \__tag_sec_end:n {#1} + } + { + \msg_warning:nnxx {tag}{wrong-sect-nesting} + { \exp_last_unbraced:NV\use_i:nn \l__tag_tmpa_tl } + { \exp_last_unbraced:NV\use_i:nn \l__tag_tmpb_tl } + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} + +% \begin{macro}{\__tag_tool_para_split:} +% Runin-sectioning command must separate the heading from the following text. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \__tag_tool_para_split: + { + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_end: + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=\l__tag_para_tag_default_tl} + \tag_mc_begin:n{} + \__tag_setup_restore_para_default: + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} + +% \begin{macro}{\__tag_setup_restore_para_default:} +% We change the para tagging in the sectioning code. +% This here restores the default. Currently it only resets the +% the tag, but perhaps more will be needed later. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \__tag_setup_restore_para_default: + { + \tl_set:Nn \l__tag_para_main_tag_tl {text-unit} + \tl_set_eq:NN\l__tag_para_tag_tl\l__tag_para_tag_default_tl + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\__tag_sec_end_display:} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \__tag_sec_end_display: + { + \tag_struct_end: %P = Hn + \__tag_setup_restore_para_default: + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% Open sec structures should be closed at the end of the document. This should +% be done before tagpdf closes the Document structure. +% \begin{macrocode} +\hook_gput_code:nnn{tagpdf/finish/before}{tagpdf/sec}{\__tag_sec_end:n{-10}} +\hook_gset_rule:nnnn {tagpdf/finish/before}{tagpdf/sec}{before}{tagpdf} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The commands \cs{mainmatter}, \cs{backmatter}, \cs{frontmatter} and +% \cs{appendix} close all \texttt{Sect} and \texttt{Part} structures. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{cmd/frontmatter/before}{\__tag_sec_end:n{-10}} +\AddToHook{cmd/mainmatter/before} {\__tag_sec_end:n{-10}} +\AddToHook{cmd/backmatter/before} {\__tag_sec_end:n{-10}} +\AddToHook{cmd/appendix/before} {\__tag_sec_end:n{-10}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Tagging tools} +% We need to provide user and package level commands +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_if_free:NT \tag_tool:n + { + \cs_new_protected:Npn \tag_tool:n #1 + { + \tag_if_active:T { \keys_set:nn {tag / tool}{#1} } + } + \cs_set_eq:NN\tagtool\tag_tool:n + } +\keys_define:nn { tag / tool} + { + ,sec-start-part .code:n = + { + \bool_if:NT\l__tag_sec_Sect_bool + { + \__tag_sec_end:n {-1} + \__tag_sec_begin:nn{-1}{tag=Part} + } + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=part,title=#1} +% \end{macrocode} +% We remap here the text-unit from the paragraph to NonStruct. +% It would be better to suppress it completly as with the other +% sectioning commands, but this would require to redefine \cs{@spart} +% and \cs{@part}, as there is the grouping, and these commands are +% all slightly different in the standard classes. So this is delayed +% to the time when sectioning commands are redefined with templates. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_set:Nn\l__tag_para_main_tag_tl {NonStruct} + \tl_set:Nn\l__tag_para_tag_tl {Span} + } + ,sec-stop-part .code:n = {\__tag_sec_end_display:} + ,sec-start-chapter .code:n = + { + \bool_if:NT\l__tag_sec_Sect_bool + { + \__tag_sec_end:n {0} + \__tag_sec_begin:nn{0}{tag=Sect} + } + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=chapter,title=#1} +% \end{macrocode} +% similar to part we remap to NonStruct for now ... +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_set:Nn\l__tag_para_main_tag_tl {NonStruct} + \tl_set:Nn\l__tag_para_tag_tl {Span} + } + ,sec-stop-chapter .meta:n = { sec-stop-part} + ,sec-start .code:n = % #1 is a name like "section" + { + \bool_if:NT\l__tag_sec_Sect_bool + { + \__tag_sec_end:n {\cs_if_exist_use:c{toclevel@#1}+0} + \__tag_sec_begin:nn {\cs_if_exist_use:c{toclevel@#1}+0}{tag=Sect} + } + \tl_set:Nn\l__tag_para_tag_tl{#1} + } + ,sec-start .value_required:n = true + ,sec-split-para .code:n = {\__tag_tool_para_split:} + ,restore-para .code:n = {\__tag_setup_restore_para_default:} + ,sec-stop .code:n = + { + \par\__tag_sec_end:n {\cs_if_exist_use:c{toclevel@#1}+0} + } + ,sec-stop .value_required:n = true + ,sec-add-grouping .bool_set:N = \l__tag_sec_Sect_bool + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \section{Sectioning commands} +% +% \subsection{\cs{part} and \cs{chapter}} +% +% \cs{part} and \cs{chapter} are defined by the classes. +% To tag them we redefine the user commands. +% This will probably break with various classes and with titlesec. +% The tagging inside relies on the para tagging. +% We do not yet use keyval in the optional argument, as this requires latex-dev +% and the naming of the keys and their key family is unclear. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{class/after} + { + \@ifundefined{chapter} + { +% \end{macrocode} +% This redefines \cs{part} in article class. +% \begin{macrocode} + \RenewDocumentCommand\part{ s O{#3} m } + { + \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi + \par + \addvspace{4ex}% + \@afterindentfalse +% \end{macrocode} +% This are the tagging commands needed at the begin. They open a Part structure +% and the structure for the title of the heading. +% \begin{macrocode} + % tagging start commands + \tag_tool:n {sec-start-part=#2} + % end tagging start commands +% \end{macrocode} +% This adds a manual target if the part is unnumbered or starred. +% It replaces the hyperref patches. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bool_lazy_any:nT + { + { #1 } + { + \int_compare_p:nNn {\c@secnumdepth}<{-1} + } + } + { + \MakeLinkTarget[part]{} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% The main call to the underlying commands. +% \begin{macrocode} + \IfBooleanTF + {#1} + { \@spart {#3} } + { \@part [#2]{#3} } +% \end{macrocode} +% and now the closing command for the tagging of the title. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_tool:n {sec-stop-part} + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Redefinitions for book and report +% \begin{macrocode} + { + \RenewDocumentCommand\chapter{ s O{#3} m } + { + \if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \global\@topnum\z@ + \@afterindentfalse +% \end{macrocode} +% This are the tagging commands needed at the begin. They open a Sect structure +% and the structure for the title of the heading. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_tool:n { sec-start-chapter= #2 } +% \end{macrocode} +% This adds a manual target if the chapter is unnumbered or starred. +% It replaces the hyperref patches. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bool_lazy_any:nT + { + { #1 } + { + \int_compare_p:nNn {\c@secnumdepth}<{0} + } + { + %in book target also needed in frontmatter + \bool_lazy_and_p:nn + { \cs_if_exist_p:c { @mainmattertrue } } + { ! \legacy_if_p:n { @mainmatter } } + } + } + { + \MakeLinkTarget[chapter]{} + %todo public function for this update! + \tl_if_blank:VF \@currentHref + { + \prop_gput:Nxx \g__tag_struct_dest_num_prop {\@currentHref}{\tag_get:n{struct_num}} + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% The main call to the underlying commands. +% \begin{macrocode} + \IfBooleanTF + {#1} + { \@schapter {#3} } + { \@chapter [#2]{#3} } +% \end{macrocode} +% and now the closing command for the tagging of the title. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_tool:n {sec-stop-chapter} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% and similar for \cs{part} +% \begin{macrocode} + \RenewDocumentCommand\part{ s O{#3} m } + { + \if@openright + \cleardoublepage + \else + \clearpage + \fi + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \if@twocolumn + \onecolumn + \@tempswatrue + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi + \null\vfil +% \end{macrocode} +% This are the tagging commands needed at the begin. They open a Part structure +% and the structure for the title of the heading. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_tool:n {sec-start-part=#2} +% \end{macrocode} +% This adds a manual target if the part is unnumbered or starred. +% It replaces the hyperref patches. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bool_lazy_any:nT + { + { #1 } + { + \int_compare_p:nNn {\c@secnumdepth}<{-1} + } + { + %in book target also needed in frontmatter + \bool_lazy_and_p:nn + { \cs_if_exist_p:c { @mainmattertrue } } + { ! \legacy_if_p:n { @mainmatter } } + } + } + { + \MakeLinkTarget[part]{} + \tl_if_blank:VF \@currentHref + { + \prop_gput:Nxx \g__tag_struct_dest_num_prop {\@currentHref}{\tag_get:n{struct_num}} + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% The main call to the underlying commands. +% \begin{macrocode} + \IfBooleanTF + {#1} + { \@spart {#3} } + { \@part [#2]{#3} } +% \end{macrocode} +% and now the closing command for the tagging of the title. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_tool:n{sec-stop-part} + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Sectioning commands based on \cs{@startsection}} +% +% The tagging relies again on the para tagging: +% we simply exchange the tag name by the one given as \#1. +% This assumes that a tag with the name of the sectioning type is defined. +% We don't try to pass the title, this will be done together with +% the new keyval handling in the user command. +% +% \subsubsection{Hyperref code} +% hyperref has to insert anchors. If the sectioning is numbered this is done by +% \cs{refstepcounter} (and so in vmode). For unnumbered section hyperref +% injects the anchor in hmode before the text, it also inserts a +% kern to compensate the indent. +% +% This means that the target of numbered and unnumbered sectioning commands +% differ, both regarding the location and in relation to the +% tagging structure: The anchor from the \cs{refstepcounter} is outside of +% the structure created by the heading title if the para tags are used, +% while the other anchors are inside and so the structure destinations are different. +% +% We unify this by suppressing the anchor from the refstepcounter. +% Also we only go back if the indent is positive. +% +% At first suppress all hyperref patches related to sectioning: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\hyper@nopatch@sectioning{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@hyp@section@target@nnn} +% A simple internal command. There is no need for something public, +% as packages defining their own version of \cs{@startsection} will +% probably need something slightly different based on \cs{MakeLinkTarget}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@hyp@section@target@nnn #1 #2 #3 %#1 optarg #2 name/counter, #3 indent + { + \makebox[0pt][l] + { + \skip_set:Nn \@tempskipa {#3} + \dim_compare:nNnF {\@tempskipa}<{0pt}{\kern-\@tempskipa} + \MakeLinkTarget#1{#2} + } + \tl_if_blank:VF \@currentHref + { + \prop_gput:Nxx \g__tag_struct_dest_num_prop {\@currentHref}{\tag_get:n{struct_num}} + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Adaption of the heading commands} +% We add to \cs{@startsection} the commands to open the \texttt{Sect} +% structure and to change the para tag. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{% + \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi + \par + \@tempskipa #4\relax + \@afterindenttrue + \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@ + \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse + \fi + \if@nobreak + \everypar{}% + \else + \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa + \fi + \tag_tool:n { sec-start=#1}%new + \@ifstar + {\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}% + {\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% To be able to correctly tag the number we need a special +% \cs{@hangfrom} variant. This is a bit tricky: +% As the paragraph starts after the \cs{setbox} luatex attributes +% are not set yet and numbers are unmarked if one doesn't pay attention. +% The code assumes that we are in vmode! +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@kernel@tag@hangfrom #1 + { + \tagstructbegin{tag=\l__tag_para_tag_tl} + \tagstructbegin{tag=Lbl} + \setbox\@tempboxa + \hbox + { +% \end{macrocode} +% In lua mode we have to set the attributes inside the box! +% \begin{macrocode} + \bool_lazy_and:nnT + {\tag_if_active_p:} + {\g__tag_mode_lua_bool} + {\tagmcbegin{tag=Lbl}} + {#1} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% We stop tagging now, to avoid that the \cs{noindent} triggers +% the paratagging. We do not disable paratagging completely, to +% avoid that the numbering goes wrong. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_stop:n{hangfrom} + \hangindent \wd\@tempboxa\noindent +% \end{macrocode} +% Restart tagging and insert the box. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_start:n{hangfrom} + \tagmcbegin{}\box\@tempboxa\tagmcend\tagstructend\tagmcbegin{}} +% \end{macrocode} +% This command is used to tag the numbers of runin. We do not try +% to avoid the empty container from the paratagging, this would require +% more changes. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@kernel@tag@svsec + { + \tag_mc_end_push: + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Lbl} + \tag_mc_begin:n{} + \@svsec + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_end: + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \cs{@sect} is only changed to replace the hyperref patches +% and to use the new \cs{@kernel@tag@hangfrom} and \cs{@kernel@tag@svsec} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth + \def\@svsec{\@hyp@section@target@nnn{[section]}{}{#3}} + \else + \LinkTargetOff + \refstepcounter{#1}% + \LinkTargetOn + \protected@edef\@svsec{\@hyp@section@target@nnn{}{#1}{#3}\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% + \fi + \@tempskipa #5\relax + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ + \begingroup + \tagtool{para-flattened=true} % or \bool_set_true\l__tag_para_flattened_bool + #6{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth + \@hangfrom {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}% + \else + \@kernel@tag@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}% + \fi + \interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}% + \endgroup + \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% + \fi + #7}% + \else + \def\@svsechd{% + #6{\hskip #3\relax + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth + \@svsec + \else + \@kernel@tag@svsec + \fi #8}% + \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% + \fi + #7}}% + \fi + \@xsect{#5}} +% \end{macrocode} +% similar for \cs{@ssect} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{% + \@tempskipa #3\relax + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ + \begingroup + \tagtool{para-flattened=true} + #4{% + \@hangfrom{\hskip #1\relax\@hyp@section@target@nnn{[section]}{}{#1}}% + \interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}% + \endgroup + \else + \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax\@hyp@section@target@nnn{[section]}{}{#3}\relax #5}}% + \fi + \@xsect{#3}} +% \end{macrocode} +% At last \cs{@xsect} needs code in two places. For display headings it has to +% restore the default para code, for run in headings it has to separated the +% heading from the following text. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@xsect#1{% + \@tempskipa #1\relax + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ + \par \nobreak + \vskip \@tempskipa + \tag_tool:n {restore-para} + \@afterheading + \else + \@nobreakfalse + \global\@noskipsectrue + \everypar{% + \if@noskipsec + \global\@noskipsecfalse + {\setbox\z@\lastbox}% + \clubpenalty\@M + \begingroup \@svsechd \endgroup + \unskip + \tag_tool:n {sec-split-para} + \@tempskipa #1\relax + \hskip -\@tempskipa + \else + \clubpenalty \@clubpenalty + \everypar{}% + \fi}% + \fi + \ignorespaces} +%</package> +% \end{macrocode} + +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latex-lab> +\ProvidesFile{sec-tagging-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [2023-05-20 v0.82 code related to the tagging of sectioning commands] +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-sec} +%</latex-lab> +% \end{macrocode} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-testphase.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-testphase.dtx index d8d9c671c39..ce882030e8f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-testphase.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-testphase.dtx @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % %% File: latex-lab-testphase.dtx -% Copyright (C) 2021-2022 The LaTeX Project +% Copyright (C) 2021-2023 The LaTeX Project % % It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the % LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this @@ -51,14 +51,69 @@ % % % \section{The Implementation} -% New output routine code is loaded in phase-II and new-or: +% new-or-1 contains the code for header and footer (tagging and +% suppressing links) and is always loaded % \begin{macrocode} -%<*tagpdf|phase-II|new-or> -\IfFileExists{latex-lab-testphase-new-or.sty} +%<*new-or-1> +\ProvidesFile{new-or-1-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [2022-11-04 v0.1a latex-lab wrapper new-or-1] +%</new-or-1> +% \end{macrocode} +% new-or combines all new-or parts (currently 1+2) +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*new-or> +\ProvidesFile{new-or-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [2022-11-04 v0.1a latex-lab wrapper new-or] +%</new-or> +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*phase-I> +\ProvidesFile{phase-I-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [2023-02-04 v0.1b latex-lab wrapper phase-I] +%</phase-I> +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*phase-II> +\ProvidesFile{phase-II-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [2022-11-04 v0.1a latex-lab wrapper phase-II] +%</phase-II> +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*phase-III> +\ProvidesFile{phase-III-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [2023-03-06 v0.1a latex-lab wrapper phase-III] +\input{phase-II-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} +\IfFormatAtLeastTF{2023-06-01} { - \RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-new-or} + \RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-block-tagging} + \RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-sec} + \RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-toc} + \RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-minipage} + \RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-graphic} + \RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-float} + \RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-bib} + \RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-text} } - {} + {\PackageWarning{latex-lab}{Testphase III needs newer format}{}} +%</phase-III> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% this is only provided for compatibility +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*tagpdf> +\ProvidesFile{tagpdf-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [2022-11-04 v0.1a latex-lab wrapper tagpdf (deprecated)] +%</tagpdf> +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*tagpdf|phase-I|phase-II|new-or|new-or-1> +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-new-or-1} +%</tagpdf|phase-I|phase-II|new-or|new-or-1> +% \end{macrocode} +% New output routine code is loaded in phase-II and new-or: +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*tagpdf|phase-II|new-or> +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-new-or-2} %</tagpdf|phase-II|new-or> % \end{macrocode} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -70,15 +125,33 @@ \AddToDocumentProperties [document]{testphase/tagpdf}{loaded} %</tagpdf|phase-I|phase-II> %<tagpdf|phase-II>\tagpdfsetup{activate,paratagging,interwordspace} +%<tagpdf|phase-II>\AddToDocumentProperties [document]{tagging/para}{active} %<phase-I>\tagpdfsetup{activate,interwordspace} %<*tagpdf|phase-I|phase-II> \AddToDocumentProperties [document]{tagging}{active} -\AddToDocumentProperties [document]{tagging/para}{active} \AddToDocumentProperties [document]{tagging/interwordspace}{active} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</tagpdf|phase-I|phase-II> % \end{macrocode} +% Wrapper files for math tagging: +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*math-lab> +\ProvidesFile{math-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [2023-01-07 v0.8 code related to the math tagging] +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-math} +%</math-lab> +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*math-sty> +\ProvidesPackage{latex-lab-testphase-math} + [2023-01-07 v0.8 code related to the math tagging] +\input{latex-lab-mathtagging.ltx} +\input{latex-lab-amsmath.ltx} +\input{latex-lab-mathtools.ltx} +\input{latex-lab-mathpkg.ltx} +%</math-sty> +% \end{macrocode} % \Finale % diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-text.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-text.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0f31c45969e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-text.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-text.dtx (C) Copyright 2023 LaTeX Project +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% +% The development version of the bundle can be found below +% +% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab +% +% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue. +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-text.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% +% \title{The \textsf{latex-lab-text} package\\ +% Changes and additions to the kernel related to the tagging of various small text commands} +% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial implementation done by Ulrike Fischer}} +% \date{Version 0.80 2023-05-28} +% +% \maketitle +% +% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}} +% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}} +% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class +% customizations}} +% +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% +% \begin{abstract} +% \end{abstract} +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% The followings contains small changes to improve the tagging of +% (inline) text commands. +% +% While the tagging of the \LaTeX{} logo is quite straightforward, tagging of +% \cs{emph} as \texttt{EM} and \cs{textbf} as \texttt{Strong} +% can have unwanted side-effect as both tags are inline tags and so not every inner +% structure is allowed. Probably both commands will need an optional argument or a +% starred variant which suppress the tagging. +% +% \section{Implementation} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*package> +%<@@=tag> +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesExplPackage {latex-lab-testphase-text} {2023-05-28} {0.8} + {Code related to the tagging of inline text commands} +% \end{macrocode} + +% \subsection{The \LaTeX\ and \TeX\ logo} +% This uses the generic hooks, so that it catches also other definitions. +% For \cs{LaTeX} we stop tagging to avoid that the inner \cs{TeX} leads to a double tagging. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{cmd/LaTeX/before} + { + \mode_leave_vertical: + \tag_mc_end_push: + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Span,actualtext=LaTeX} + \tag_mc_begin:n{} + \tag_stop:n{LaTeX} + } +\AddToHook{cmd/LaTeX/after} + { + \tag_start:n{LaTeX} + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_end: + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{} + } +\AddToHook{cmd/TeX/before} + { + \mode_leave_vertical: + \tag_mc_end_push: + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Span,actualtext=TeX} + \tag_mc_begin:n{} + } +\AddToHook{cmd/TeX/after} + { + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_end: + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Emphasizing} +% We tag \cs{emph} but leave commands like \cs{textbf} alone, as it is not +% clear if they always have a semantic meaning. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{cmd/emph/before} + { + \mode_leave_vertical: + \tag_mc_end_push: + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Em} + \tag_mc_begin:n{} + } + +\AddToHook{cmd/emph/after} + { + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_end: + \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +%</package> +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latex-lab> +\ProvidesFile{text-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [2023-05-28 v0.8 code related to the tagging of bib and citations] + +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-text} + +%</latex-lab> +% \end{macrocode} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-hyperref-changes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-hyperref-changes.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..186f388a190 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-hyperref-changes.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,202 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-toc-hyperref-changes.dtx (C) Copyright 2022-2023 LaTeX Project +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% +% The development version of the bundle can be found below +% +% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab +% +% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue. +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-toc-hyperref-changes.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% \title{The \textsf{latex-lab-toc-hyperref-changes} package\\ +% Changes and additions to hyperref related to toc entries} +% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial implementation done by Ulrike Fischer}} +% \date{Version 0.83 2023-06-07} +% +% \maketitle +% +% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}} +% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}} +% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class +% customizations}} +% +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% +% \begin{abstract} +% \end{abstract} +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% The followings contains various change needed for hyperref for the new toc tagging +% code. They should be only loaded if hyperref is used! +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*package> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \section{Changes for hyperref} +% \subsection{\cs{contentsline},\cs{addcontentsline}} +% The standard \cs{contentsline} and \cs{addcontentsline} +% should also be used with hyperref (together +% with more changes below) so we have to disable the redefinition in hyperref (this +% requires hyperref version 7.00v! +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\hyper@nopatch@toc{} +\AddToHook{package/hyperref/after} + { + \@ifpackagelater{hyperref}{2023-02-07}{} + {\PackageWarning{latex-lab-testphase-toc-tagging}{hyperref too old}{}} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Add links to toc entries} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOn +\AddToHook{package/hyperref/after} + { + \AddToHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/before}[hyp] + { + \tl_if_blank:nF {#2}%text + { + \tl_if_blank:nF {#4}%destination + { + \int_case:nnF {\Hy@linktoc} + { + {0}{} %none + {1}{\hyper@linkstart{link}{#4}} %section + {2}{} %page + } + {\hyper@linkstart{link}{#4}} %all + } + } + } + \AddToHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/after}[hyp] + { + \tl_if_blank:nF {#2} + { + \tl_if_blank:nF {#4} + { + \int_case:nnF {\Hy@linktoc} + { + {0}{} %none + {1}{\hyper@linkend} %section + {2}{} %page + } + {\hyper@linkend} %all + } % none + } + } + + \AddToHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/before}[hyp] + { + \tl_if_blank:nF {#3} + { + \tl_if_blank:nF {#4} % + { + \int_case:nnF {\Hy@linktoc} + { + {0}{} %none + {1}{} %section + {2}{\hyper@linkstart{link}{#4}} %page + } + {\hyper@linkstart{link}{#4}} %all + } % none + } + } + \AddToHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/after}[hyp] + { + \tl_if_blank:nF {#3} + { + \tl_if_blank:nF {#4} + { + \int_case:nnF {\Hy@linktoc} + { + {0}{} %none + {1}{} %section + {2}{\hyper@linkend} %page + } + {\hyper@linkend} %all + } % none + } + } + \AddToHookWithArguments{cmd/addcontentsline/before}[hyp] + {% + \Hy@addcontentsline@addbookmark + {#1} + {#2} + {#3}% + } + } +\ExplSyntaxOff +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsection{Add bookmark code to \cs{addcontentsline}} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\Hy@addcontentsline@addbookmark[3]%#1 toc type, #2 level, #3 content + {% + \ifx\@currentHref\@empty + \Hy@Warning{% + No destination for bookmark of \string\addcontentsline,% + \MessageBreak destination is added% + }% + \phantomsection + \fi + \begingroup + \expandafter\ifx\csname toclevel@#2\endcsname\relax + \begingroup + \def\Hy@tempa{#1}% + \ifx\Hy@tempa\Hy@bookmarkstype + \Hy@WarningNoLine{% + bookmark level for unknown #2 defaults to 0% + }% + \else + \Hy@Info{bookmark level for unknown #2 defaults to 0}% + \fi + \endgroup + \expandafter\gdef\csname toclevel@#2\endcsname{0}% + \fi + \edef\Hy@toclevel{\csname toclevel@#2\endcsname}% + \Hy@writebookmark{\csname the#2\endcsname}% + {#3}% + {\@currentHref}% + {\Hy@toclevel}% + {#1}% + \ifHy@verbose + \begingroup + \def\Hy@tempa{#3}% + \@onelevel@sanitize\Hy@tempa + \let\temp@online\on@line + \let\on@line\@empty + \Hy@Info{% + bookmark\temp@online:\MessageBreak + thecounter {\csname the#2\endcsname}\MessageBreak + text {\Hy@tempa}\MessageBreak + reference {\@currentHref}\MessageBreak + toclevel {\Hy@toclevel}\MessageBreak + type {#1}% + }% + \endgroup + \fi + \endgroup + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +%</package> +% \end{macrocode} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1c1ce7f44e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,473 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-toc-kernel-functions.dtx (C) Copyright 2022-2023 LaTeX Project +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% +% The development version of the bundle can be found below +% +% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab +% +% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue. +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% +% \title{The \textsf{latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes} package\\ +% Changes and additions to the kernel related to tagging and links in toc entries} +% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial implementation done by Ulrike Fischer}} +% \date{Version 0.83 2023-06-07} +% +% \maketitle +% +% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}} +% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}} +% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class +% customizations}} +% +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% +% \begin{abstract} +% \end{abstract} +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% The followings contains various changes to kernel commands +% needed for the tagging of table of contents and similar lists. +% \section{General kernel and class changes} +% +% Some of the changes can probably could go into the kernel. +% This are marked with [kernel?], +% the other are marked with [latex-lab]. A few changes must be done in the classes. +% They are marked as [class]. They are inserted with hooks here: this will break +% if a non-standard class is used. +% +% \subsection{Providing the counter representation \cs{theHxx} generally} +% [kernel?] +% +% The \cs{theHxx} representation allows to create a unique representation of a counter +% that is for example used to create destination names. It will also be needed +% to add |/Ref| keys to various tagging structures. It makes therefore sense +% to provide it by default as soon as a counter is created. The |\@addtoreset| change +% (taken also from hyperref) tries to ensure the counter stays unique if it is reset. +% +% At first we suppress the patches from hyperref: +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*kernelchange> +\def\hyper@nopatch@counter{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@definecounter#1{\expandafter\newcount\csname c@#1\endcsname + \setcounter{#1}\z@ + \global\expandafter\let\csname cl@#1\endcsname\@empty + \@addtoreset{#1}{@ckpt}% + \global\expandafter\let\csname p@#1\endcsname\@empty + \expandafter\gdef\csname theH#1\endcsname{\the\value{#1}}%new + \expandafter + \gdef\csname the#1\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter + {\expandafter\@arabic\csname c@#1\endcsname}} +\def\@addtoreset#1#2{\expandafter\@cons\csname cl@#2\endcsname {{#1}}% + \expandafter\gdef\csname theH#1\endcsname{\csname theH#2\endcsname.\the\value{#1}}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% The following counters are defined in the kernel +% \begin{macrocode} +\gdef\theHenumi{\the\value{enumi}} +\gdef\theHenumii{\the\value{enumii}} +\gdef\theHenumiii{\the\value{enumiii}} +\gdef\theHenumiv{\the\value{enumiv}} +\gdef\theHequation{\the\value{equation}} +\gdef\theHfootnote{\the\value{footnote}} +\gdef\theHmpfootnote{\the\value{mpfootnote}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Providing and updating \cs{@currentHref}} +% [kernel?] +% +% \cs{@currentHref} contains the current unique representation of a counter. +% It is useful also without hyperref as it allows to connect with a |/Ref| +% key a toc entry with the heading it refers too. So \cs{refstepcounter} +% is extended to update the command. This is done at the begin so that the +% hyperref code can still adapt it later (using the cmd/refstepcounter/after hook +% would be too late, and could also break with cleverref.) +% +% We also provide a kernel version that hyperref doesn't touch and so will never +% set a target. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@currentHref{} +\def\refstepcounter#1{\stepcounter{#1}% + \edef\@currentcounter{#1}% + \xdef\@currentHref {#1.\csname theH#1\endcsname}% + \protected@edef\@currentlabel + {\csname p@#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname the#1\endcsname}% +} +\let\@kernel@refstepcounter\refstepcounter +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Assigning the headings level numbers} +% [kernel?] +% +% The code for the toc must be able to compare the level of |subsection| against +% |section|. So some numbers are needed. It uses for now the commands used by +% |hyperref| for the bookmark levels. While headings are more a class thing, it +% could make sense to provide a standard set already in the kernel. +% The numbers are a bit different to the one in hyperref, but imho sensible. +% +% Note for the future: +% once that heading stuff is turned into template +% instances the template should set that number. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\toclevel@document{-10} +\def\toclevel@part{-1} +\def\toclevel@chapter{0} +\def\toclevel@section{1} +\def\toclevel@subsection{2} +\def\toclevel@subsubsection{3} +\def\toclevel@paragraph{4} +\def\toclevel@subparagraph{5} +\def\toclevel@figure{1} +\def\toclevel@table{1} +%</kernelchange> +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsection{load kernel changes} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*package> +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-kernel-changes} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{\cs{contentsline} extension} +% [latex-lab] +% The tagging code must add code at the begin and end of \cs{contentsline}. +% This code must have access to the arguments. We set it up as config point +% for now. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@contentsline@cfgpoint@before#1#2#3#4{} +\def\@contentsline@cfgpoint@after#1#2#3#4{} +% \end{macrocode} +% for the hooks we need that the \cs{l@XX} pass also the destination and +% that \cs{l@XX} takes three arguments. +% TODO: test that, if there are two many problems we should pass the +% destination through a command name ... +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\contentsline#1#2#3#4% + {% + \@contentsline@cfgpoint@before{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}% + \gdef\@contentsline@destination{#4}% + \csname l@#1\endcsname{#2}{#3}% + \@contentsline@cfgpoint@after{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}% + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{\cs{addcontentsline} changes} +% [latex-lab] +% +% \cs{addcontentsline} should always write the unique counter representation +% \cs{@currentHref} so that we can create the |/Ref| key. At the same time +% we need a hook, so that hyperref can add its bookmarks code, the generic hook +% with arguments is ok. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\addcontentsline#1#2#3{% #1=toc extension, #2= heading type, tag + \addtocontents{#1}{% + \protect\contentsline{#2}{#3}{\thepage}{\@currentHref}\protected@file@percent + }} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{\cs{@starttoc}} +% [kernel?] +% +% We add a configuration point before and after reading the file +% for the tagging. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@starttoc@cfgpoint@before#1{} +\def\@starttoc@cfgpoint@after#1{} +\def\@starttoc#1{% + \begingroup + \makeatletter + \@starttoc@cfgpoint@before{#1}% + \@input{\jobname.#1}% + \@starttoc@cfgpoint@after{#1} + \if@filesw + \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname + \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax + \fi + \@nobreakfalse + \endgroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Formatting of the toc entries} +% +% \subsubsection{Kernel commands} +% [latex-lab] or [kernel?]? +% +% We need hooks before and after the content and before and after the page number. +% The number needs some thing so that it can be tagged as label. +% The text and the page +% hooks are used in manual \cs{l@xx} commands and in \cs{l@xx} defined by +% \cs{@dottedtocline} or by other means. +% The arguments of the following hooks are: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item[\#1] level as a \emph{number} (integer expression), see above for the standard +% numbering. The standard first argument of \cs{contentsline} is not used, as +% \cs{@dottedtocline} knows only a number. +% \item[\#2] content (the second argument of a \cs{contentsline} +% \item[\#3] page (the third argument of a \cs{contentsline} +% \item[\#3] target (the fourth argument of a \cs{contentsline} +% \end{itemize} +% \begin{macrocode} +\NewMirroredHookPairWithArguments{contentsline/number/before}{contentsline/number/after}{1}% +\NewMirroredHookPairWithArguments{contentsline/text/before}{contentsline/text/after}{4}% +\NewMirroredHookPairWithArguments{contentsline/page/before}{contentsline/page/after}{4}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The dot in the leader must be set as artifact. +% But luatex requires that the mc are set outside the leaders. +% So we need a config point. +% +% \cs{@dottedtocline} needs hooks and formatting commands. +% We add a sixth argument so that it can grab the destination too. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dottedtocline@cfgpoint@leaders#1{#1} + +\def\@dottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{% + \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else + \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@ + {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip + \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue + \interlinepenalty\@M + \leavevmode + \@tempdima #3\relax + \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/before}{4}{#1}{#4}{#5}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \csname contentsline@text@#1@format\endcsname{#4}% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/after}{4}{#1}{#4}{#5}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \nobreak + \@dottedtocline@cfgpoint@leaders{% + \leaders\hbox{$\m@th + \mkern \@dotsep mu\hbox{.}\mkern \@dotsep + mu$}\hfill}% + \nobreak + \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\normalfont \normalcolor + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/before}{4}{#1}{#4}{#5}{\@contentsline@destination}% + #5% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/after}{4}{#1}{#4}{#5}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \kern-\p@\kern\p@}% + \par}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{\cs{numberline}} +% [kernel?] +% Inside or outside the box? +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\numberline#1{\hb@xt@\@tempdima{% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/number/before}{1}{#1}% + #1\hfil + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/number/after}{1}{#1}% + }} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{\cs{l@xx} in the classes} +% Depending on the class we have to redefine also more commands +% For other classes it should be documented what is needed. +% Let the commands grab also the third arguments. If a class redefines them again +% it will break tagging anyway. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{class/article/after} + { + \renewcommand*\l@part[2]{% as in contentsline: content, page + \ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax + \addpenalty\@secpenalty + \addvspace{2.25em \@plus\p@}% + \setlength\@tempdima{3em}% + \begingroup + \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth + \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth + {\leavevmode + \large \bfseries + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/before}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \csname contentsline@text@-1@format\endcsname{#1}% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/after}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \hfil + \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/before}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + #2% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/after}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \kern-\p@\kern\p@}}\par + \nobreak + \endgroup + \fi} +\renewcommand*\l@section[2]{% + \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\z@ + \addpenalty\@secpenalty + \addvspace{1.0em \@plus\p@}% + \setlength\@tempdima{1.5em}% + \begingroup + \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth + \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth + \leavevmode \bfseries + \advance\leftskip\@tempdima + \hskip -\leftskip + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/before}{4} + {\toclevel@section}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \csname contentsline@text@1@format\endcsname{#1}% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/after}{4} + {\toclevel@section}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \nobreak\hfil + \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/before}{4} + {\toclevel@section}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + #2% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/after}{4} + {\toclevel@section}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \kern-\p@\kern\p@}\par + \endgroup + \fi} + } +\AddToHook{class/report/after} + { + \renewcommand*\l@part[2]{% + \ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax + \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}% + \addvspace{2.25em \@plus\p@}% + \setlength\@tempdima{3em}% + \begingroup + \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth + \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth + {\leavevmode + \large \bfseries + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/before}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \csname contentsline@text@-1@format\endcsname{#1}% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/after}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \hfil + \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/before}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + #2% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/after}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \kern-\p@\kern\p@}}\par + \nobreak + \endgroup + \fi} + \renewcommand*\l@chapter[2]{% + \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne + \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}% + \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@ + \setlength\@tempdima{1.5em}% + \begingroup + \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth + \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth + \leavevmode \bfseries + \advance\leftskip\@tempdima + \hskip -\leftskip + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/before}{4} + {\toclevel@chapter}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \csname contentsline@text@0@format\endcsname + {#1}% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/after}{4} + {\toclevel@chapter}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \nobreak\hfil + \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/before}{4} + {\toclevel@chapter}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}%% + #2% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/after}{4} + {\toclevel@chapter}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}%% + \kern-\p@\kern\p@}\par + \penalty\@highpenalty + \endgroup + \fi} + } +\AddToHook{class/book/after} + { + \renewcommand*\l@part[2]{% + \ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax + \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}% + \addvspace{2.25em \@plus\p@}% + \setlength\@tempdima{3em}% + \begingroup + \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth + \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth + {\leavevmode + \large \bfseries + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/before}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}%% + \csname contentsline@text@-1@format\endcsname{#1}% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/after}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}%% + \hfil + \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/before}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}%% + #2% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/after}{4} + {\toclevel@part}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}%% + \kern-\p@\kern\p@}}\par + \nobreak + \endgroup + \fi} + \renewcommand*\l@chapter[2]{% + \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne + \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}% + \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@ + \setlength\@tempdima{1.5em}% + \begingroup + \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth + \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth + \leavevmode \bfseries + \advance\leftskip\@tempdima + \hskip -\leftskip + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/before}{4} + {\toclevel@chapter}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \csname contentsline@text@0@format\endcsname + {#1}% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/text/after}{4} + {\toclevel@chapter}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \nobreak\hfil + \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/before}{4} + {\toclevel@chapter}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + #2% + \UseHookWithArguments{contentsline/page/after}{4} + {\toclevel@chapter}{#1}{#2}{\@contentsline@destination}% + \kern-\p@\kern\p@}\par + \penalty\@highpenalty + \endgroup + \fi} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +%</package> +% \end{macrocode} + +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latex-lab> +\ProvidesFile{toc-tagging-latex-lab-testphase.ltx} + [2023-05-20 v0.81 code related to the tagging of toc and similar lists] + +\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-toc} + +%</latex-lab> +% \end{macrocode} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-tagging-functions.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-tagging-functions.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a39ace44e5b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-tagging-functions.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,365 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% File: latex-lab-toc-tagging-functions.dtx (C) Copyright 2022-2023 LaTeX Project +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the +% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this +% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version +% of this license is in the file +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% +% The development version of the bundle can be found below +% +% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab +% +% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue. +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{l3doc} +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +\begin{document} + \DocInput{latex-lab-toc-tagging-functions.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% +% \fi +% +% +% \title{The \textsf{latex-lab-toc-tagging-functions} package\\ +% Tagpdf functions related to the tagging of toc and similar lists} +% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial implementation done by Ulrike Fischer}} +% \date{Version 0.82 2023-05-20} +% +% \maketitle +% +% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}} +% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}} +% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class +% customizations}} +% +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% +% \begin{abstract} +% \end{abstract} +% +% Header for the testphase package +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*header> +\ProvidesExplPackage {latex-lab-testphase-toc} {2023-05-20} {0.82} + { commands related to the tagging of toc-like lists} +%</header> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% The followings contains various functions related to the tagging of the +% table of contents and similar list. The functions will at some time +% be moved inside the tagpdf code. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*package> +%<@@=tag> +% \end{macrocode} +% \section{Temporary variables} +% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_toc_tmpa_tl} +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_toc_tmpa_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \section{General struct commands} +% The following variables and commands are not restricted to toc, but +% probably will be need in other places too. +% \begin{variable}{\g_@@_struct_dest_num_prop} +% This variable records for (some or all, not clear yet) +% destination names the related structure number to allow +% to reference them in a Ref. The key is the destination. +% Moved into tagpdf! +% \end{variable} +% +% We use \cs{refstepcounter} to store the relation between +% destination names/\cs{@currentHref} and structure numbers +% +% TODO: the functions should be moved into tagpdf so that one +% doesn't has to test if the prop exists or not. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{cmd/refstepcounter/after} + { + \tl_if_blank:VF \@currentHref + { + \prop_if_exist:NT \g_@@_struct_dest_num_prop + { + \prop_gput:Nxx \g_@@_struct_dest_num_prop {\@currentHref}{\tag_get:n{struct_num}} + } + } + } +\AddToHook{cmd/H@refstepcounter/after} + { + \tl_if_blank:VF \@currentHref + { + \prop_if_exist:NT \g_@@_struct_dest_num_prop + { + \prop_gput:Nxx \g_@@_struct_dest_num_prop {\@currentHref}{\tag_get:n{struct_num}} + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{variable}{\g_@@_struct_ref_by_dest_prop} +% This variable contains structures whose Ref key should be updated +% at the end to point to structured related with this destination. +% As this is probably need in other places too, it is not only a toc-variable. +% Moved into tagpdf! +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{macro}{\g_@@_struct_ref_by_dest:} +% This command is executed and update the Ref keys +% of the structures listed in |\g_@@_struct_ref_by_dest_prop|. +% It is currently only relevant for the |TOCI|. But other structures +% could need that later too. +% The command is executed in the |tagpdf/finish/before| hook. +% \begin{macrocode} +\msg_new:nnn { tag } {struct-dest-unknown} + { + Destination~#1~has~no~related~structure.\\ + /Ref~for~structure~#2~not~updated + } + +\cs_new_protected:Npn \g_@@_struct_ref_by_dest: + { + \prop_map_inline:Nn\g_@@_struct_ref_by_dest_prop + { + \prop_get:NnNTF \g_@@_struct_dest_num_prop {##2} \l_@@_tmpa_tl + { + \@@_struct_gput_data_ref:ee + { ##1 } + { \tag_struct_object_ref:e{ \l_@@_tmpa_tl }} + } + { + \msg_warning:nnnn {tag}{struct-dest-unknown}{##2}{ ##1} + } + } + } +\hook_gput_code:nnn {tagpdf/finish/before}{tagpdf/struct/Ref}{\g_@@_struct_ref_by_dest:} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \section{Toc code} +% \begin{variable}{\g_@@_toc_level_int,\g_@@_toc_stack_seq} +% |\g_@@_toc_level_int| records in a toc the current absolute level. +% We must close open structures at the end of the toc, for this +% we maintain a stack |\g_@@_toc_stack_seq|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\int_new:N \g_@@_toc_level_int +\seq_new:N \g_@@_toc_stack_seq +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} + +% \begin{macro}{\_tag_toc_starttoc_init:n} +% The init code clears the stack, and set the level to -100 +% and start to TOC structure. We also disable paratagging. +% The |/Title| is currently simply the type, but this could be done nicer. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_toc_starttoc_init:n #1 + { + \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_para_bool + \seq_gclear:N \g_@@_toc_stack_seq + \int_gset:Nn \g_@@_toc_level_int {-100} + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=TOC,title=#1} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Now map it into the config point: +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set_protected:Npn\@starttoc@cfgpoint@before#1 + { + \@@_toc_starttoc_init:n{#1} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_toc_starttoc_finalize:} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_toc_starttoc_finalize: + { + \int_step_inline:nn + {\seq_count:N \g_@@_toc_stack_seq } + {\tag_struct_end:} + \tag_struct_end: + \seq_gclear:N \g_@@_toc_stack_seq + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Now map it into the config point: +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set_protected:Npn\@starttoc@cfgpoint@after#1 + { + \@@_toc_starttoc_finalize: + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} + +% \begin{macro}{\@@_toc_end:n} +% This commands ends all TOC on the stack with a level higher than the argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_toc_end:n #1 + { + \seq_get:NNT\g_@@_toc_stack_seq \l_@@_toc_tmpa_tl + { + \bool_lazy_and:nnT + { + \str_if_eq_p:ee{\tl_head:N\l_@@_toc_tmpa_tl}{TOC} + } + { + \int_compare_p:nNn {#1}<{\tl_tail:N \l_@@_toc_tmpa_tl} + } + { + \seq_gpop:NN\g_@@_toc_stack_seq \l_@@_toc_tmpa_tl + \tag_struct_end: + \@@_toc_end:n{#1} + } + } + } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_toc_end:n {e} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_toc_contentsline_begin:nnn} +% This is main command executed at the begin of a |\contentsline|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_toc_contentsline_begin:nnn #1 #2 #3 %#1 level, #2 content, #3 destination + { + \tag_if_active:T + { +% \end{macrocode} +% We detect the intended level by checking the value of |toclevel@...| +% (currently only provided by hyperref, but should be there always). +% To be on the safe side we set it to 1 if not defined. +% \begin{macrocode} + \ExpandArgs{c}\providecommand { toclevel@#1 }{ 1 } % just in case ... + \int_compare:nNnF { \use:c{toclevel@#1} } > {\use:c{c@tocdepth}} + { +% \end{macrocode} +% if level goes up, start new sub TOC unless we are at the begin +% \begin{macrocode} + \bool_lazy_and:nnT + { \int_compare_p:nNn { \g_@@_toc_level_int } > {-100} } + { \int_compare_p:nNn { \use:c{toclevel@#1} } > { \g_@@_toc_level_int } } + { + \seq_gpush:Nx \g_@@_toc_stack_seq {{TOC}\use:c{toclevel@#1}} + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=TOC} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% if level goes down close all TOC's with a higher level +% \begin{macrocode} + \int_compare:nNnT + { \use:c{toclevel@#1} } < { \g_@@_toc_level_int } + { + \@@_toc_end:e { \use:c{toclevel@#1} } + } +% \end{macrocode} +%if same level do nothing +% update toclevel to the current level. +% \begin{macrocode} + \int_gset:Nn \g_@@_toc_level_int { \use:c{toclevel@#1} } +% \end{macrocode} +% now open the TOCI, the tagging of the +% inner structure is left to the |\l@xxx| commands. +% setting the title is not strictly necessary but looks nicer +% but we have to remove the |\numberline| +% \begin{NOTE}{UF} +% perhaps keep the number? How to insert a space then +% \end{NOTE} +% \begin{macrocode} + \group_begin: + \text_declare_expand_equivalent:Nn \numberline \use_none:n + \exp_args:Nx \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=TOCI,title={\text_purify:n {#2}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% The TOCI structure should get a /Ref, so we put a request with its destination +% name into the prop. +% \begin{NOTE}{UF} +% This only works with hyperref currently. Without hyperref we +% need to store fake names. +% \end{NOTE} +% \begin{macrocode} + \prop_gput:Nxx \g_@@_struct_ref_by_dest_prop + { \tag_get:n {struct_num} }{#3} + \seq_gpush:Nx \g_@@_toc_stack_seq {{TOCI}\use:c{toclevel@#1}} + \group_end: + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Now map it into the config point: +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set_protected:Npn\@contentsline@cfgpoint@before#1#2#3#4 + { + \@@_toc_contentsline_begin:nnn {#1}{#2}{#4} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_toc_contentsline_end:n} +% This is the closing code of a |\contentsline|. +% If the contentsline was actually printed, the code has to +% close the TOCI structure and to update the stack. +% \begin{macrocode} +\msg_new:nnn {tag}{toc-no-TOCI}{Missing~TOCI~structure~on~toc~stack} + +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_toc_contentsline_end:n #1 %#1 level name + { + \int_compare:nNnF { \use:c{toclevel@#1} } > {\use:c{c@tocdepth}} + { + \seq_gpop:NNT \g_@@_toc_stack_seq\l_@@_tmpa_tl + { + \str_if_eq:eeTF{\tl_head:N\l_@@_tmpa_tl}{TOCI} + { + \tag_struct_end: + } + { + \msg_warning:nn{tag}{toc-no-TOCI} + } + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Now we map it to the config point +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set_protected:Npn \@contentsline@cfgpoint@after #1#2#3#4 + { + \@@_toc_contentsline_end:n {#1} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Tagging of the content} +% This need discussion. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{contentsline/text/before}[tagpdf]{% + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Reference}% + \tag_mc_begin:n{tag=Reference}} +\AddToHook{contentsline/text/after}[tagpdf]{% + \tag_mc_end:} +\AddToHook{contentsline/page/before}[tagpdf]{% + \tag_mc_begin:n{tag=Reference}} +\AddToHook{contentsline/page/after}[tagpdf]{% + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_end:} %Reference +\AddToHook{contentsline/number/before}[tagpdf]{% + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Lbl}% + \tag_mc_begin:n{tag=Lbl}} +\AddToHook{contentsline/number/after}[tagpdf]{% + \tag_mc_end: + \tag_struct_end: + \tag_mc_begin:n{tag=Reference}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dottedtocline@cfgpoint@leaders#1{% + \tag_mc_begin:n{artifact}\tag_stop:n{leaders}\nobreak#1\nobreak\tag_start:n{leaders}\tag_mc_end:} +% \end{macrocode} + +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%</package> +% \end{macrocode} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab.ins index bc668a71e1d..1989ddcfa34 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab.ins +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/latex-lab/latex-lab.ins @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ %% driver files from the dtx file(s) in this package when run through %% LaTeX or TeX. %% -%% Copyright (C) 2021-2022 The LaTeX Project +%% Copyright (C) 2021-2023 The LaTeX Project %% %% %% This file is part of the `LaTeX-lab Bundle' for LaTeX. @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ This is a generated file. -Copyright 2021,2022 LaTeX Project +Copyright 2021-2023 LaTeX Project This file was generated from file(s) of the `LaTeX-lab Bundle'. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ @@ -68,15 +68,85 @@ where one can also log issues in case there are any. % #1-latex-lab-testphase.ltx \generate{\file{phase-I-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{phase-I}}} \generate{\file{phase-II-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{phase-II}}} +\generate{\file{phase-III-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{phase-III}}} + \generate{\file{tagpdf-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{tagpdf}}} \generate{\file{new-or-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{new-or}}} +\generate{\file{new-or-1-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{new-or-1}}} + +\generate{\file{math-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{math-lab}}} +\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-math.sty}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{math-sty}}} % support files (the new-or code is a private package to make life easier) -\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-new-or.sty}{\from{latex-lab-new-or.dtx}{code}}} +\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-new-or-2.sty}{\from{latex-lab-new-or-2.dtx}{code}}} +\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-new-or-1.sty}{\from{latex-lab-new-or-1.dtx}{code}}} \generate{\file{latex-lab-footmisc.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-footnotes.dtx}{footmisc}}} \generate{\file{latex-lab-footnotes.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-footnotes.dtx}{kernel}}} +\generate{\file{latex-lab-mathtagging.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-mathtagging.dtx}{kernel}}} + +\generate{\file{latex-lab-amsmath.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-amsmath.dtx}{kernel}}} +\generate{\file{latex-lab-mathtools.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-mathtools.dtx}{kernel}}} +\generate{\file{latex-lab-mathpkg.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-mathpkg.dtx}{kernel}}} + +\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-sec.sty}{\from{latex-lab-sec.dtx}{package}}} +\generate{\file{sec-tagging-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-sec.dtx}{latex-lab}}} + + +\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-toc.sty}{% + \from{latex-lab-toc-tagging-functions.dtx}{header} + \from{latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes.dtx}{package} + \from{latex-lab-toc-tagging-functions.dtx}{package} + \from{latex-lab-toc-hyperref-changes.dtx}{package}}} + +\generate{\file{toc-tagging-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{% + \from{latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes.dtx}{latex-lab}}} + +\generate{\file{latex-lab-kernel-changes.sty} + {\from{latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes.dtx}{kernelchange} + \from{latex-lab-sec.dtx}{kernelchange} + }} + + +\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-graphic.sty}{% + \from{latex-lab-graphic.dtx}{package}}} + +\generate{\file{graphic-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{% + \from{latex-lab-graphic.dtx}{latex-lab}}} + +\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-block-tagging.sty}{\from{latex-lab-block-tagging.dtx}{package}}} +\generate{\file{block-tagging-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-block-tagging.dtx}{latex-lab}}} + +\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-minipage.sty}{% + \from{latex-lab-minipage.dtx}{package}}} + +\generate{\file{minipage-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{% + \from{latex-lab-minipage.dtx}{latex-lab}}} + + \generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-float.sty}{% + \from{latex-lab-float.dtx}{package}}} + +\generate{\file{float-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{% + \from{latex-lab-float.dtx}{latex-lab}}} + +\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-bib.sty}{% + \from{latex-lab-bib.dtx}{package}}} + +\generate{\file{bib-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{% + \from{latex-lab-bib.dtx}{latex-lab}}} + +\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-text.sty}{% + \from{latex-lab-text.dtx}{package}}} + +\generate{\file{text-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{% + \from{latex-lab-text.dtx}{latex-lab}}} + +\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-firstaid.sty}{% + \from{latex-lab-firstaid.dtx}{package}}} +\generate{\file{firstaid-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{% + \from{latex-lab-firstaid.dtx}{latex-lab}}} + \endbatchfile |